Yamaha PSR-A350 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-A350

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: de handleiding

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

CLAVIER NUMÉRIQUE

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

CLAVIER NUMÉRIQUE

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Manual de instrucciones

Kullanıcı el kitabı

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Manual de instrucciones

Kullanıcı el kitabı

EnglishDeutschFrançaisTürkçe

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the

advanced and convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About the Manuals

In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available.

MIDI Reference

Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do.

Computer-related Operations

Contains instructions about computer-related functions.

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.

To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-A350” (for example) to the Model

Name box, then click [SEARCH].

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Song Book (only in English)

Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing

the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge.

Yamaha Online Member

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this

manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• AC adaptor

• Music rest

• Online Member Product Registration

*1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer.

*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.

Insert the music rest

into the slots as shown.

Using the Music Rest

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

About the Manuals................................................ 2

Included Accessories............................................ 2

Using the Music Rest............................................ 2

Formats and functions.......................................... 5

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals 8

Setting Up 10

Power Requirements.......................................... 10

Connecting Headphones or External Audio

Equipment...................................................... 12

Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack

.. 12

Turning the Power On/Off................................... 13

Setting the Volume ............................................. 13

Auto Power Off Function .................................... 13

Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 14

Making the sound more spacious

(Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 14

Display Items and Basic Operations 15

Display Items...................................................... 15

Basic Operations ................................................ 15

Reference

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16

Selecting a Main Voice....................................... 16

Resetting the Voice settings to Default

(Playing the Oriental Voice)........................... 16

Playing the Grand Piano Voice........................... 16

Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 17

Playing a Split Voice in the left-hand area.......... 17

Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend

wheel ............................................................. 18

Setting the Touch Response on/off.................... 18

Adjusting the Voice parameters.......................... 19

Using the Metronome ......................................... 19

Applying effects to the sound ............................. 19

Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 20

Using Oriental Scales 22

Setting Oriental Scales....................................... 22

Applying Scale Tuning to the Accompaniment

Tuning............................................................ 23

Registering the Scale settings............................ 23

Recalling the Scale settings ............................... 23

Playing Styles 24

Style Variations—Sections ................................. 25

Changing the Tempo.......................................... 26

Registering a Style file........................................ 26

Chord types for Style playback........................... 27

Looking up chords with the Chord Dictionary..... 28

Playing Songs 29

Listening to a Demo Song...................................29

Selecting and playing back a Song.....................29

Background music playback ...............................30

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause...30

Changing the Melody Voice ................................30

A-B Repeat..........................................................31

Turning Each Part On/Off....................................31

Playing an External Audio Device with the

Built-in Speakers 32

Lowering the volume of a melody part

(Melody Suppressor function) ........................32

Using the Song Lesson Feature 33

Downloading the Song Book...............................33

Keys To Success ................................................33

Listening, Timing and Waiting.............................35

Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or

Waiting ...........................................................36

Phrase Repeat ....................................................36

Recording Your Performance 37

Track Structure of a Song ...................................37

Quick Recording..................................................37

Recording to a specified track.............................38

Clearing a User Song..........................................38

Playing the Keyboard with Two People

(Duo Mode) 39

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 40

Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration

Memory ..........................................................40

Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration

Memory ..........................................................40

Disabling recall of specific items (Freeze)...........41

The Functions 42

Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 46

Connecting to a computer...................................46

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.............................46

Backup and Initialization 46

Backup Parameters.............................................46

Initialization .........................................................46

Appendix

Troubleshooting............................................. 47

Specifications.................................................48

Index................................................................49

Song Book Sample ........................................ 50

Voice List ........................................................ 60

Drum Kit List ..................................................66

Song List.........................................................71

Style List.........................................................72

Effect Type List ..............................................74

Contents

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Formats and functions

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the

MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-

compatible music data can be accurately

played by any GM-compatible tone generator,

regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is

affixed to all software and hardware products

that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified

version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone

generation format. Naturally, you can play

back any XG song data using an XGlite tone

generator. However, keep in mind that some

songs may play back differently compared to

the original data, due to the reduced set of

control parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal

Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for con-

necting a computer with peripheral

devices. It allows “hot swapping” (con-

necting peripheral devices while the

power to the computer is on).

Style File Format (SFF)

The Style File Format combines all of

Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-

how into a single unified format.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and

batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in

accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects

on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste

disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the

chemical involved.

(weee_battery_eu_en_01)

The model number, serial number, power require-

ments, etc., may be found on or near the name plate,

which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this

serial number in the space provided below and retain

this manual as a permanent record of your purchase

to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

For AC adaptor

WARNING

• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic

instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.

• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.

CAUTION

• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible.

If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor

from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet,

keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if

the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the

instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

For PSR-A350

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or

even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These

precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the

cord, or place heavy objects on it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 48) only. Using the wrong adaptor

can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open

the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal

components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp

or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases,

bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any

openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument,

turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the

AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha

service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

DMI-5 1/3

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning

item may fall over and cause a fire.

• Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in

explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage.

- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be

charged.

- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as

necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys.

- Use the specified battery type (page 48) only.

- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model,

and made by the same manufacturer.

- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the

+/- polarity markings.

- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used

for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument.

- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came

with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when

charging.

• Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally

swallow them.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the

battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or

skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery

fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical

burns.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If

you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.)

Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to

you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but

are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord

can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not

to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to

prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip

over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are

using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,

immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug

from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off,

electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level.

When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to

unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage

to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC adaptor

Location

Connections

DMI-5 2/3

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps

on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you

or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or

operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,

switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period

of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can

cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss

or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage

to the product, damage to data, or damage to

other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,

stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.

Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

When you use the instrument along with an application on

your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, we recommend that you

set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to

avoid noise caused by communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or

vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct

sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to

the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified

operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the

instrument, since this might discolor the panel or

keyboard.

 Maintenance

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• Some of the data of this instrument (page 46) are retained

when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may

be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save

your important data onto an external device such as a

computer (page 46).

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data

including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which

Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha

has license to use others’ copyrights. Due to copyright

laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to

distribute media in which these contents are saved or

recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to

those in the product.

* The contents described above include a computer

program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE

data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.

* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your

performance or music production using these contents is

recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is

not required in such cases.

 About functions/data bundled with the

instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or

arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the

original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual

are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are

the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective

companies.

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

DMI-5 3/3

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

Setting Up

!1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6

@1 @2 @3 @4

#1 #0

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

Song List

(page 71)

Style List

(page 72)

Display

(page 15)

Front Panel

Voice List

(page 60)

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [ ] (Standby/On) switch.....................page 13

w [MASTER VOLUME] dial......................page 13

e [DEMO] button......................................page 30

r [FUNCTION] button..............................page 42

t [METRONOME] button.........................page 19

y [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 26

u PART

[L] button ..............................................page 35

[R] button..............................................page 35

u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 37

[REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 37

i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 33

o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 36

!0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button

...............................................................page 35

!1 [A-B REPEAT] button...........................page 31

!2 [REW] button ........................................page 30

!3 [FF] button ............................................page 30

!4 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 30

!1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .......................page 24

!2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.................page 25

!3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button....................page 25

!4 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 24

!5 [START/STOP] button ..................pages 24, 29

!6 [REC] button .........................................page 37

!7 [SONG] button......................................page 29

!8 [VOICE] button .....................................page 16

!9 [STYLE] button.....................................page 24

@0 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] ...........page 15

@1 [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO] button

...............................................................page 16

[ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button ....

......page 14

@3 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 32

@4 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 40

@5 [DUAL] button.......................................page 17

@6 [SPLIT] button ......................................page 17

@7 [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button..........page 20

@8 [TOUCH] button....................................page 18

@9 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...........................page 18

#0 [SCALE SETTING] buttons..................page 22

#1 [SCALE MEMORY] buttons .................page 23

In the Lesson mode

In the Recording mode

In the Song mode

In the Style mode

#2 #3 #4

#5 #6

Rear Panel

#2 [SUSTAIN] jack..................................... page 12

#3 [USB TO HOST] terminal*....................page 46

#4 [AUX IN] jack ........................................page 32

#5 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack .....................page 12

#6 DC IN jack ............................................. page 10

* For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computer-

related Operations” (page 2) on the website. When connecting,

use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables

cannot be used.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Buttons having this indication can be used to call

up an alternate function when the relevant button

is pressed and held. Hold down this button until

the function is called up.

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Power Requirements

Although the instrument will run either from an AC

adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is

more environmentally friendly than batteries and

does not deplete resources.

Using an AC adaptor

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off

(the backlight display is off).

2 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack (power

supply jack).

3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

 Notice for the AC adaptor

Depending on your particular locale, the AC adaptor

having a separable plug should be used. If the plug is

accidentally removed from the AC adaptor, make

sure to follow the explanations below for your safety.

Reattaching the plug removed from the AC

adaptor

Without touching the metallic section, slide the plug

into place as shown below then push it in completely

until you hear the click sound.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 48) only. Using the

wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC

outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trou-

ble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.

• After turning off the power, follow this procedure in reverse

order to disconnect the AC adaptor.

• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an

AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the

instrument.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

adaptor

DC IN jack

(page 9)

NOTE

• Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor.

Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.

• Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug.

To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be

careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and

plug.

Plug

Slide the plug as

indicated

* The shape of the plug differs depending on locale.

WARNING

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Using Batteries

This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/

Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickel-

metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batter-

ies). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH

batteries are recommended for this instrument, since

other types may result in poorer battery performance.

 Installing the batteries

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off.

2 Open the battery compartment cover located on

the instrument’s bottom panel.

3 Insert the six new batteries, putting them in the

correct direction according to the illustration.

4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that

it locks firmly in place.

When battery power becomes too low for proper

operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound

may be distorted, and other problems may occur.

When this happens, make sure to replace all batter-

ies with new ones or already-recharged ones.

 Setting the battery type

After installing new batteries and turning the power

on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately

(rechargeable or not) via Function number 061 (page

44).

• Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries

installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data

being recorded or transferred at the time.

• Change the setting of the instrument according to the kind

of battery you are using (Battery Type; page 44).

NOTICE

• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the

specified charger device when charging.

• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an

AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the

instrument.

• Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of

the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly.

NOTE

NOTICE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting Headphones or

External Audio Equipment

A pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone

plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitor-

ing. The speakers are automatically shut off when a

plug is inserted into this jack.

The [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack also functions as an

external output. You can connect the [PHONES/

OUTPUT] jack to a computer, a keyboard amplifier,

stereo system, mixer, recorder, or other line-level

audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to

that device.

Connecting a Footswitch to the

[SUSTAIN] jack

You can produce a natural sustain as you play by

pressing a Footswitch (FC5/FC4A; sold separately)

plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long

period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level,

since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experi-

ence any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-

sician.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-

ponents, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn

off the power for all components.

• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to

the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

• When connecting this instrument to an external speaker or

headphone, we recommend that you select the “Headphon”

(Headphones) type in Master EQ. For details, refer to “Select-

ing an EQ Setting for the Best Sound” on page 14.

1/4” stereo

phone plug

CAUTION

NOTICE

NOTE

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

• The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and

style (automatic accompaniment; page 24).

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Turning the Power On/Off

1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.”

2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the

power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial. To turn off the power,

press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a

second.

Setting the Volume

When you start playing, use the [MASTER VOLUME]

dial to adjust the volume of the entire keyboard

sound.

Auto Power Off Function

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this

instrument features an Auto Power Off function that

automatically turns the power off if the instrument is

not operated for a specified period of time. The

amount of time that will elapse before the power is

automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.



To set the time that elapses before Auto

Power Off is executed:

Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until

“AutoOff” (Function 060; page 44) appears, then use

the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value.

Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes)

Default value: 30 (minutes)



To disable the Auto Power Off function:

Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power while holding down the

lowest key. The Auto Power Off function also can be

disabled by selecting Off in Function number 060

(page 44).

• When using a AC adaptor, even when the power is off, a

small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the

instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a

long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the

wall AC outlet.

• Do not use this instrument at a high volume level for a long

period of time, or your hearing may be damaged.

CAUTION

• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the

power is turned off. For details, see page 46.

• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not

turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified

period of time. Always turn off the power manually when

the instrument is not in use.

• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period

of time while connected to an external device such as an

amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the

instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to

the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-

tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the

power to turn off automatically when a device is con-

nected, disable Auto Power Off.

NOTE

NOTICE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Selecting an EQ Setting for the

Best Sound

Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you

the best possible sound when listening through differ-

ent reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal

speakers, headphones, or an external speaker sys-

tem.

Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO]

button for longer than a second to call

up “039 MasterEQ” (Function 039; page

43).

“MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the current Master EQ type appears.

Use the [+] or [-] button to select the

desired Master EQ type.

Master EQ types

Making the sound more spacious

(Ultra-Wide Stereo)

You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider

sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing

the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the

Ultra-Wide Stereo effect.

Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-

ton to turn it on.

The sound will expand around you—as if the

speaker position is outside of the instrument.

Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-

ton again to turn it off.

To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type:

Press the [FUNCTION] button several times to call up

“Wide” (Function 040;

page 43

), then use the Number

buttons.

1 Speaker

Optimum for listening via the instru-

ment’s built-in speakers.

2 Headphone

Optimum for headphones, or for listen-

ing via external speakers.

3 Boost Features more powerful sound.

4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.

5Bright

Lowers the mid range for a brighter

sound.

6 Mild

Lowers the high range for a softer

sound.

MasterEQ

Speaker

039

Current Master

EQ type

Hold for longer

than a second.

GrandPno

001

Appears when Ultra-

Wide Stereo is on.

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Display Items and Basic Operations

Display Items

Basic Operations

Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are

used to select items and change values.

 Number buttons

Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or

value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes,

the first zeroes can be omitted.

 [-] and [+] buttons

Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1.

Press and hold either button to continuously increase or

decrease the value in the corresponding direction.

GrandPno

001

003

These indicate the operating condition

of the instrument.

Song/Voice/Style

Normally this indicates the notes you

play. When the Song Lesson function

is used, this indicates the current

notes and chord of playback. When

the Dictionary function (page 28) is

used, this indicates the notes of the

chord you specify.

Notation

• Any notes occurring below or above

the staff are indicated by “8va.”

• For a few specific chords, not all notes

may be shown, due to space limita-

tions in the display.

NOTE

This area indicates the Lesson

related status is on.

Keys To Success

(page 33)

Phrase Repeat (page

36)

Indicates the Passing

Status (page 34) of

the Keys To Success

lesson.

Lesson Indication

Each indication is shown when the

corresponding function is turned on.

...

Touch Response

(

page 18

)

...

Ultra-Wide Stereo

(page 14)

...

Auto Accompani-

ment (page 24)

... Split (

page 17

)

... Dual (

page 17

)

... Harmony (

page 20

)

... Arpeggio (

page 20

)

... Duo (

page 39

)

On/Off status

Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto

Accompaniment range (page 24) of the keyboard, or

specified via Song playback.

Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and

chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use.

Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or

when using the Dictionary function.

Chord

Keyboard Display

• Only notes occurring in the keyboard range are indicated. So, for some

combinations of the selected Song and Main Voice, not all notes may

be shown during the Song playback.

NOTE

Normally indicates the current measure number

of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION]

button (page 42) is in use, this indicates the

Function number.

Indicates the current beat of playback.

Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or

target Track of Song recording (page 31, 38).

Lit: Track contains data

Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data

Flashing: Track is selected as recording track

Measure or Function

Beat

Song Track status

003

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3], or simply

press [3].

Example: Selecting Voice 003,

Harpsichord.

Press briefly to

increase.

Press briefly to

decrease.

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-

ment has a large range of Voices that includes traditional oriental instruments, as well

as guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects—

giving you a wide variety of musical sounds.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice number and name will be shown.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]

buttons to select the desired Voice.

Refer to the Voice List on page 60.

Play the keyboard.

Preset Voice Types

To reset various settings to their default values, press

the [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO] button.

Voice 230 “Oud” will automatically be selected as the

Main Voice.

To quickly and easily call up a piano sound for simple

piano playing, press the [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/

PIANO] button, repeatedly if necessary, until Voice

001 “Grand Piano” is shown in the display.

This selects Voice 001 “Grand Piano” as the Main

Voice.

Selecting a Main Voice

001–176,

230–274

Instrument Voices (including sound effects).

177–209

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are

assigned to individual keys, from which they

can be played. Details on the instruments and

key assignments of each Drum Kit can be

found in the Drum Kit List on page 66.

210–229

Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by

simply playing the keyboard (page 20).

275–613 XGlite Voices (page 63)

000

One Touch Setting

The One Touch Setting feature automatically

selects the most suitable Voice when you

select a Style or Song (excepting the Song

inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select

Voice number “000” to activate this feature.

GrandPno

001

Voice n a m e

The Voice shown here

becomes the Main Voice

for the instrument.

Voice number

Appears after the

[VOICE] button is

pressed.

Flute

096

Select 096 Flute

Resetting the Voice settings to

Default (Playing the Oriental

Voice)

• If Voice 230 “Oud” has already been selected, pressing the

button selects Voice 001 “Grand Piano.” In this case, press the

button once more.

Playing the Grand Piano Voice

Oud

230

NOTE

GrandPno

001

Reference

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different

Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”

Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.

Press the [DUAL] button again to exit

from Dual.

To select a different Dual Voice:

Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suit-

able for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a

different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual]

button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 027; page 43),

then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,

you can play a different Voice between the Left hand

and Right hand areas.

Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split.

The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and

Right hand areas.

You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area

of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and

Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the key-

board.

The highest key for the Left hand area is referred

to as the “Split Point” (Function 007;

page 42

)

which can be changed from the default F#2 key.

Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit

from Split.

To select a different Split Voice:

Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice”

(Function 031;

page 43

), then use the number but-

tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Layering a Dual Voice

GrandPno

001

Appears when Dual

Voice is on

Two Voices will

sound at the

same time.

Playing a Split Voice in the left-

hand area

GrandPno

001

Appears when Split

Voice is on

Split Voice

Main Voice and

Dual Voice

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add

smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the key-

board.

Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward

to lower the pitch. When you release the wheel it will

automatically return to center position and the key-

board pitch will return to normal.

Adjust the pitch bend range

You can adjust the range of the pitch bend wheel in

semitone increments. This can be set via Function

number 006 (page 42).

When the pitch bend range is set to “2,” for example,

rolling the wheel all the way up will produce a maxi-

mum pitch rise of 2 semitones (one whole tone), and

rolling it all the way down will produce a maximum

pitch drop of the same amount (2 semitones or one

whole tone). With the highest possible pitch bend

range setting of “12,” the pitch bend range becomes

+/-1 octave.

When Touch Response is on, you can control the vol-

ume of notes according to how hard you play the

keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press the

[TOUCH] button to turn the Touch Response off.

When Touch Response is off, the same volume will

be produced no matter how hard you play the keys.

Press the [TOUCH] button again to turn the Touch

Response on.

Changing the Touch Response Sensi-

tivity

When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sen-

sitivity of the keyboard (how the sound responds to

your playing strength). This can be set via Function

number 008 (page 42).

Adding pitch variations with the

Pitch Bend wheel

Setting the Touch Response on/

off

• The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices

(such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in

the display.

GrandPno

001

Appears when Touch

Response is on.

NOTE

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can

be shifted by up or down in octaves) and Chorus

Depth can be individually adjusted for the Main, Dual,

and Split Voices.

You can adjust each of the parameters above in the

Function settings (

page 43

The instrument features a built-in metronome (a

device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for

practicing.

Press the [METRONOME] button to start

the metronome.

Press the [METRONOME] button again

to stop the metronome.

To change the tempo:

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo

value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo.

To set the Time Signature:

Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up

“TimeSigN” (Function 051; page 44), then use the

Number buttons to set the number of beats per mea-

sure. Also, the length of one beat can be set via

“TimeSigD” (Function 052; page 44).

To set the Metronome Volume:

This can be set via Function number 053 (page 44).

You can apply the various effects to enhance the

instrument’s sound.

Reverb

Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the

sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called

up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another

one via Function number 035 (

page 43

). You can also

set the Reverb Level via Function number 036 (

page

Chorus

Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more

spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is

called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select

another one via Function number 037 (

page 43

Panel Sustain

By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function

number 038 (

page 43

), you can add a fixed, auto-

matic sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can

also be applied as desired with the footswitch (sold

separately; page 12).

Adjusting the Voice parameters

Voice Parameters (Volume, Octave, Chorus

Depth)

• Main Voice Parameters: Function numbers 024–026

• Dual Voice Parameters: Function numbers 028–030

• Split Voice Parameters: Function numbers 032–034

Using the Metronome

Tempo

090

Current Tempo value

Applying effects to the sound

• Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to

which sustain is not applied.

NOTE

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Main

Voice.

By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply har-

mony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or

echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice or

the Dual Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is

selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automati-

cally played back when you simply play the appropri-

ate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could

play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—

and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a

variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be

used creatively in music production as well as perfor-

mance.

Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-

ton to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio

function.

When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on,

the most suitable one will be selected for the cur-

rent Main Voice.

If you want to select a specific type, select it by

the operation steps 2 and 3 below.

Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO]

button for longer than a second so that

“Harm/Arp” (Function 043; page 43)

appears on the display.

After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the

current type appears.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]

buttons to select the desired type.

When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer

to the Harmony Type list on page 74; to specify an

Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list on

page 75.

Press a note or notes on the keyboard to

trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio.

When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony

part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for

example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the

played sound of the Main Voice.

Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeg-

gios (broken chords) are automatically played

back when you simply play the appropriate notes

on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase

differs depending on the number of pressed notes

and the area of the keyboard.

To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off,

press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-

ton again.

Adding Harmony or Arpeggio

• The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main

Voice.

• When selecting a Voice number between 210 and 229,

the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on.

• When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005,

the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand

melody play if you turn on the Style (page 24) and press

chords in the auto accompaniment range of the key-

board.

GrandPno

001

Analogon

106

Appears when the Har-

mony is turned on.

Appears when the

Arpeggio is turned on.

NOTE

• When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 178,

select one of the following dedicated Voices as the Main

Voice.

143–173: Select a Drum Kit from Voice Nos. 196–206.

174 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit 3” (Voice No. 179).

175 (Khaligi): Select “Khaligi Kit 1” (Voice No. 181).

176 (Maghrebi): Select “Arabic Mix Kit” (Voice No. 180).

177 (Iranian): Select “Iranian Kit 1” (Voice No. 186).

178 (Turkish): Select “Turkish Kit 4” (Voice No. 191).

Duet

001

Harm/Arp

043

Current type

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

To adjust the Harmony Volume:

This can be adjusted via Function number 044 (

page

To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity:

This can be adjusted via Function number 045 (

page

Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the

Footswitch (Hold)

You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback

continues even after the note has been released, by

pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN]

jack.

Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of

times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 046;

page 44) item appears on the display.

After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the

current setting is shown.

Use the number buttons [1]–[3], [+], [-]

buttons to select “Arp Hold.”

If you want to restore the footswitch function to

sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both

hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.”

Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio

playback using the footswitch.

Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then

press the footswitch. Even if you release the

notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop

Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch.

How the effect is applied to the sound for

the various Types

• Harmony Type 001 to 005

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when

Auto Accompaniment is on (page 24).

• Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo)

Keep holding

down the keys.

• Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo)

Play the keys.

• Arpeggio Type 027 to 178

Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice

and the Dual Voice.

Arpeggio function applies only to the split

Voice.

When Split is off:

When Split is on:

• Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/

Dual Voices simultaneously.

• Selecting a Voice number between 210 and 222 as

the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split auto-

matically.

NOTE

Pdl Func

Sustain

046

Arp Hold

046

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Using Oriental Scales

The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily change the pitches of specific

notes and create your own scales. Up to four scale settings can be stored for instant

recall, allowing you to call up the settings at any time—even when you are playing.

Setting a Scale

The SCALE SETTING buttons let you easily lower

the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create

your own oriental scales. These buttons simulate a

one-octave keyboard (C through B).

Press the button corresponding to the key whose

pitch you want to lower (the indicator above the

selected button is lit). Press again to return to normal

pitch (0 cents). The setting affects all notes with the

same note name over all octaves.

Adjusting the Scale Tuning of each

note

You can also adjust the scale tuning of each note in

1-cent increments as follows.

Hold down the desired “note” button (C–

B) of the SCALE SETTING buttons for

longer than a second.

The Scale Tuning function (one of the Functions

010–021; page 42) appears.

Adjust the Scale Tuning.

Use the [+]/[-] or number buttons to adjust the

desired tuning.

The range is from “-64” to “63” cents.

Using the [+] and [-] buttons:

Press the [+] or [-] button, repeatedly if necessary,

until the desired pitch value appears in the dis-

play. To rapidly move through the values, press

and hold the [+] or [-] button, until the desired

pitch value appears in the display.

Negative values:

You can also enter negative values directly, by

simultaneously holding down the [-] button and

using the number buttons.

Adjust other notes as desired.

To do this, simply repeat steps 1–2 above.

Setting Oriental Scales

• In musical terms, a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone (100 cents

equal one semitone).

• The Scale Setting function has no effect on some Voices such

as the Drum Kit/SFX Kit Voices, and song playback.

NOTE

Hold for longer than

a second.

• To instantly reset the value to its default setting (0 cents),

press the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

Tune D

012

Current cent value

NOTE

Using Oriental Scales

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

You can select whether Scale Tuning is applied to

accompaniment or not. This can be set via Function

number 009: “TuneAcc” (page 42).

The settings you make (using the SCALE SETTING

buttons or via Function numbers 009–021; page 42)

can be memorized to the SCALE MEMORY buttons

for instant recall.

Make the desired scale settings (page

22).

While holding the SCALE MEMORY

[MEMORY] button, press one of the

SCALE MEMORY [1]–[4] buttons.

The indicator of the selected button will flash dur-

ing writing, then will light to indicate that the data

has been stored.

The scale settings stored to a SCALE MEMORY but-

ton can be recalled at any time simply by pressing

the appropriate button.

Scale Memory can be turned off by pressing the cur-

rently lit SCALE MEMORY [1]–[4] button. The indica-

tor goes out and the PSR-A350 returns to the regular

scale setting.

Applying Scale Tuning to the

Accompaniment Tuning

Registering the Scale settings

• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!”

message is shown in the display. Doing so can dam-

age the flash memory and result in a loss of data.

• The Scale Memory data is retained in memory even

when the power is turned off.

TuneAcc

oFF

009

Current setting

CAUTION

NOTE

Recalling the Scale settings

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Playing Styles

This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate

“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of

Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.

Press the [STYLE] button, then use the

number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select

the desired Style.

The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in

the Style List (page 72).

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

on the Auto Accompaniment.

With this operation, the area of the keyboard to

the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the

“Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for

specifying the chords.

The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment

range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can

be changed from the default of F#2 via Function

number 007 (page 42).

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-

ment range to start playback.

Play a melody with the right hand and chords with

the left hand.

For information about chords, refer to “Chord

Types for Style Playback” (page 27) or use the

Chord Dictionary function (page 28).

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations

to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,

refer to page 25.

Adjusting the Style Volume

To adjust the volume balance between Style play-

back and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume.

This can be set via Function number 001 (page 42).

LoveSong

139

Style Name

Style Number

This icon appears when the [STYLE]

button is pressed.

LoveSong

139

This icon appears when auto-

matic accompaniment is on.

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

Auto

Accompaniment

range

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

To play back the rhythm part only

If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm

part can be played back, and you can play a melody

performance using the entire keyboard range.

LoveSong

139

Flashes when sync start is on.

Split Point

• Since the Pianist category Styles (204–210) have no

rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start

rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make

sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page.

NOTE

Playing Styles

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to

vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to

match the song you are playing. These instructions

cover a typical example for using the Sections.

1–3

Same as Steps 1–3 in page 24.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to

select Main A or Main B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the

Intro section.

Play a chord with your left hand to start

playback of the Intro.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown

below). For information on how to enter chords,

see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 27.

After the Intro finishes, play the key-

board according to the progression of

the Song you are playing.

Play chords with your left hand while playing mel-

odies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/

AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will

change to Fill-in then Main A or B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

The Section switches to the Ending. When the

Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-

cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing

back.

Style Variations—Sections

MAIN A

Current Section

INTRO≥A

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

Auto Accompa-

niment range

FILL A≥B

ENDING

Playing Styles

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo

value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the

Tempo value.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset

the value to the default tempo of the current Style or

Song.

Using the Tap function

While a Song or Style is playing back, press the

[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo

to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is

stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times

to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for

a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat

Song or Style.

Style data created on another instrument or a com-

puter (“.sty” file transferred from a computer) can be

registered to the Style numbers 211–220, and you

can play them like the internal preset Styles.

Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a

computer to this instrument by using

Musicsoft Downloader.

For instructions, refer to the online PDF manual

(page 2) “Computer-related Operations.”

Press the [FUNCTION] button several

times until “StyleReg” (Function 023;

page 43) appears.

After about two seconds, the name of one of the

transferred Style files name will appear in the dis-

play. If necessary, select the desired Style file by

using the [+] or [-] button.

Press the [0] button.

As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 211–

220) appears on the display. If necessary, select

the desired number using the [+] or [-] button.

Press the [0] button again.

A confirmation message for the register operation

will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/

NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to actually reg-

ister the file.

Press the [STYLE] button, using the

number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select

the registered Style (from 211–220), and

then try playing it back.

Changing the Tempo

Tempo

090

Current Tempo value

Registering a Style file

• The register operation cannot be canceled during

execution. Never turn off the power during the opera-

tion. Doing so may result in data loss.

StyleReg

023

NOTICE

Playing Styles

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accom-

paniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musi-

cally, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.

 indicates the root note.

• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:

m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2

• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.

• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.

• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm

and bass parts will be played.

Chord types for Style playback

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two,

or three fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white and

black keys to the left of it (three

keys altogether).

Playing Styles

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

The Dictionary function is useful when you know the

name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn

how to play it.

Press and hold the [1 LISTENING

2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer

than a second.

“Dict.” will appear in the display.

This operation will divide the entire keyboard into

the three ranges as illustrated below.

• The Root section:

Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no

sound.

• The Chord Type section:

Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no

sound.

• The Keyboard Play section:

Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in

the above two ranges.

As an example, learn how to play a GM7

(G major seventh) chord.

2-1.

Press the “G” key in the Root section.

“G” is shown as the root note.

2-2.

Press the “M7” key in the Chord Type sec-

tion.

The notes you should play for the specified

chord (Root note and Chord Type) are con-

veniently shown in the display, both as

notation and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+]/[-] buttons.

Following the notation and keyboard

diagram in the display, try playing a

chord in the Keyboard Play section.

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell

sound signals your success and the chord name

in the display flashes.

Looking up chords with the

Chord Dictionary

Dict.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Chord Type section

Root

section

Keyboard

Play section

Far right of the

keyboard

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers

to C major. However, when specifying major chords

here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the

root note.

• These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary

function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(

11 ),

5, M7

5, M7aug,

m7(11), mM7(9), mM7

5, 7

5, sus2

Dict.

001

(9)

mM7

m(9)

m7(9)

m7b5 7(9)

7(b13)

dim7

7aug

7sus4

7(b9)

7(#9)

7(13)

7(#11)

dim

aug

sus4

Dict.

001

Chord name (Root and Type)

Individual notes of chord

(keyboard)

Notation of

chord

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Playing Songs

You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of

the functions, such as Lesson.

 Song Category

The Songs are organized by category as listed below.

Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo

Songs in sequence.

The Demo Songs (001–005) are played back in

sequence. When the last Song (005) is finished, play-

back will start again from the first Song (001) and

repeat continuously.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or

press the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the

Number buttons to select the desired

Song.

Refer to the Song List (page 71).

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

playback.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button

again.

To change the tempo:

Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 26.

Adjusting the Song Volume

To adjust the volume balance between Song play-

back and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume.

This can be set via Function number 002 (page 42).

These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.

Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with

ease, and another more challenging version.

This is a collection of popular folk songs and classical pieces from around the world. Join in

by playing the right-hand melody.

These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces.

Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing.

Songs (User Songs) you record yourself.

Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 2).

Listening to a Demo Song

• You can select a song by using the [+]/[-] buttons after press-

ing the [DEMO] button.

Selecting and playing back a

Song

NOTE

Elise 1

006

Song name

Song number

Appears after the [Song]

button is pressed.

• External MIDI Songs containing the Portamento Control

and Scale Tune settings may not be played correctly.

NOTE

Playing Songs

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button

will play back only five internal Demo Songs repeat-

edly. This setting can be changed so that, for exam-

ple, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting

you use the instrument as a background music

source.

Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer

than a second.

“DemoGrp” (Function 057; page 44) is shown in

the display for a few seconds, followed by the cur-

rent repeat playback target.

Use the [+] or [-] button to select a play-

back group.

Press the [DEMO] button to start play-

back.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again

or press the [START/STOP] button.

Random Song Playback

When the Demo Group (above) is set to something

other than “Demo,” the playback order via the

[DEMO] button can be changed between numerical

order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNC-

TION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Func-

tion 058;

page 44

) is called up, then select “Normal”

or “Random.”

Like the transport controls on an audio player, this

instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW)

and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song.

You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other

desired Voice.

Select a Song.

Select the desired Voice.

Press and hold the [VOICE] button for

longer than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display

for a few seconds, and the selected Voice

replaces the Song’s original melody Voice.

Background music playback

Demo Preset songs (001–005)

Preset All preset songs (001–050)

User All User songs (051–055)

Download All songs transferred from a computer (056–)

• When User songs and Download songs data do not

exist, Demo songs are played back.

• To transfer Songs from a computer to this instrument,

refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 2).

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Song Fast Forward, Fast

Reverse, and Pause

• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast

Forward will only work within the range between A and B.

• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song

playback by using the [DEMO] button.

Changing the Melody Voice

• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody

Voice.

• You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song.

Fast Reverse

During playback, press

this button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the Song.

Fast Forward

During playback, press this

button to rapidly skip ahead

to a later point in the Song.

Pause

During playback, press

this button to pause play-

back, and press again to

start from that point.

NOTE

Playing Songs

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

You can play back only a specific section of a Song

repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B

point (end point) in one-measure increments.

Start playback of the Song (page 29).

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the start point, press

the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A

point.

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the end point, press

the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set

the B point.

The specified A-B section of the song will now

play repeatedly.

To cancel repeat playback, press the

[A-B REPEAT] button.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below),

a Song consists of two Parts, which can be turned on

or off individually by pressing the corresponding but-

ton, L or R.

By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off dur-

ing playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned

on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on

the keyboard.

A-B Repeat

• You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song

is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to

select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT]

button for each point, then start playback.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the

Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting

playback.

• The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you

select another Song mode.

Repeat playback of this section

NOTE

Turning Each Part On/Off

• Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the

Parts.

FrereJac

018

010

Lit: Track con-

tains data

Unlit: Track is

muted or con-

tains no data

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers

You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player,

with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you

play the keyboard along with playback of your music player.

Turn off the power for both the external

audio device and this instrument.

Connect the audio device to the instru-

ment’s [AUX IN] jack.

Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at

one side for connecting to this instrument and the

plug matching the output jack of the external

audio device at the other side.

Turn on the external audio device, then

this instrument.

Play back the connected external audio

device.

The sound of the audio device is output through

the speakers of this instrument.

Adjust the volume balance between the

external audio device and this instrument.

If possible, adjust the playback level of the external

audio device first, to achieve optimum balance.

Play the keyboard along with the sound

of the audio device.

After finishing the performance, stop

playback of the audio device.

When the sound of an external audio device is output

through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the

volume of the melody part of stereo playback. You

can use the function to cancel the melody part then

practice it via the keyboard.

Play back the connected external audio

device.

Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-

ton to turn it on.

When the melody or vocal sound may

not be canceled (or lowered) as expected

Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR]

button for longer than a second to call

up “SupprPan” (Function 041; page 43)

while the Melody Suppressor function is

turned on.

Adjust the pan position of the sound to

be canceled (lowered) by using the [+],

[-] buttons.

Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-

ton again to turn it off.

• You can adjust the level of the input from the external

audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function num-

ber 003 (page 42) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons.

• Before connecting, turn off the power of both this

instrument and the external audio device. Also,

before turning the power on or off, make sure to set

all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage

to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent

hearing loss may occur.

• After connecting, first turn on the power to the exter-

nal audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this

order when you turn the power off.

Audio device (Portable

audio player, etc.)

Stereo-mini

plug

NOTE

CAUTION

NOTICE

Lowering the volume of a melody

part (Melody Suppressor function)

• If an external audio device is not properly connected to

the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, the Melody Suppressor

function cannot be turned on or shown in the display,

even if you press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button.

• Depending on the particular music content, the melody

or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if

the Melody Suppressor is turned on.

MelodySP

Appears when Melody Suppressor is on

NOTE

026

SupprPan

Hold for longer

than a second.

(Left – Center – Right)

L63 – C – R63

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Using the Song Lesson Feature

You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,”

“Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a

Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in

playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a spe-

cific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we

suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song

Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registra-

tion at the following website:

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score

in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To

obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration

at the following website:

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in

the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the

entire Song.

Prepare the Song Book.

Download the Song Book from the above web-

site, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs

at the end of this manual.

The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are

pre-programmed) will differ depending on the

Song. For details, refer to the Song Book.

Press the [SONG] button, then select a

Song for your lesson.

Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the

“LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corre-

sponding page of the Song Book.

Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button

to engage this lesson.

The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R”

or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating

that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If

you have already passed several Steps, the next

Step number appears on the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

Lesson.

After the lead-in, playback of the current Step

starts.

Practice the phrase in the current Step.

Referring to the notation in the Song Book and

the notes shown on the display, press the notes.

Downloading the Song Book

Keys To Success

• All preset Songs other than 001–005 can be used with

this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category

Songs.

NOTE

Elise 1

006

• For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is

applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may

be slower than original.

Step01

Appears when Keys to

Success is on

Lesson part

: Right-hand lesson

: Left-hand lesson

: Both-hands lesson

Current Step number

Step01

001

NOTE

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Confirm the evaluation in the current

Step.

When the current Step reaches the end, your per-

formance will be evaluated and your score (from

0–100) is shown in the display.

A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did

not pass this Step and you should try the same

Step again, which begins automatically. A score

of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step

and you should try the next Step, which begins

automatically.

Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on.

In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all

the way through the Song. When you pass all

Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automati-

cally be turned off and playback stops.

To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO

SUCCESS] button.

Confirming the Passing Status

You can confirm the passing status of each Song

simply by selecting a Song and each Step.

When Step is selected

When Song is selected

Clearing the Passing Status

You can clear existing passing status entries for the

entire Song or a specific Step of the Song.

To clear the passing status entries of all Steps:

Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS

TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds,

with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared”

message will appear on the display.

To clear the passing status entry for a specific

Step:

Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success,

select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS

TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds.

A “Cleared” message will appear on the display.

• If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the

Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of

the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice”

appears in the display.

• Even during lesson, you can select another Step by

using the [+]/[-] buttons.

Excellen

068

Displayed when you’ve

passed the Step.

NOTE

• This operation cannot be executed during playback.

Step01

001

✩ : Passed

No information: Not yet passed

Elise 1

006

001

✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet

passed in addition to the last Step

✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed

✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step

✩✩✩ : All Steps passed

NOTE

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Lesson 1—Listening

In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The

model melody/chords of the part you selected will

sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well.

Lesson 2—Timing

In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the

notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong

notes, the correct notes shown in the display will

sound.

Lesson 3—Waiting

In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on

the display. The Song pauses until you play the right

note, and playback tempo will change to match the

speed at which you are playing at.

Press the [SONG] button then select a

Song for your lesson.

Press either or both the [R] and [L] but-

tons to select the part you want to prac-

tice.

Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING

3 WAITING] button to start playback of

the Song Lesson.

Pressing this button repeatedly will change the

Lesson number from 1: LISTENING  2: TIMING

 3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this button until

the desired number is shown on the display.

When Lesson playback reaches to the

end, check your evaluation Grade on the

display.

“2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your per-

formance in four levels.

After the evaluation display has appeared, the

lesson will start again from the beginning.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by

pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Listening, Timing and Waiting

• If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained dur-

ing Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF

via the Function number 056 (page 44).

• The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs

(SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page

46), but cannot be applied to the User Songs.

• In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the

current Song does not contain a left-hand part.

NOTE

RightLeft

BothHand

Left-hand

lesson

Right-hand

lesson

Both-hands

lesson

NOTE

• During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by

pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any

time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

• The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting;

page 16) during the Lesson.

• When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key

position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave

units), depending on the selected Voice.

• The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during les-

sons.

NOTE

~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

Excellent!

Very Good!

Good

NOTE

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page

33) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson

(page 35).

Enable the Keys to Success lesson.

Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 33.

Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-]

buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING

2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly

to select the desired lesson.

The selected lesson playback starts under the

Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the

current Step via the selected Lesson. As evalua-

tion for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play

key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is

not available.

To return to only the Keys to Success

mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING

3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select

“off.”

To exit from the Lesson mode, press the

[KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.

You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by

selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks

pre-programmed in the Preset Songs. You can con-

firm the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book

(page 2).

Practicing only a single Phrase

During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT]

button at the phrase you want to practice. The corre-

sponding Phrase number will appear in the display

and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off

the L or R part (page 31), then practice the phrase

which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied.

Even during repeat playback, you can select any

other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you

can return to normal playback by pressing the

[PHRASE REPEAT] button again.

Using Phrase Repeat with Listening,

Timing or Waiting

With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTEN-

ING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or

three times to start and use Lesson playback with

Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again sev-

eral times to exit from the Lesson mode stops play-

back and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode.

Practicing two or more Phrases

By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B

(as the end point), you can practice two or more

Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback,

press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current

Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the

desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again

to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display,

and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts.

To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button

again.

Keys to Success with Listening,

Timing or Waiting

Phrase Repeat

Phrase mark

Repeat playback of this

section

• In this status, the evaluation function is not available.

• You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped

by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons.

• Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between

Point A and the end of the Song.

REPEAT

P03

Appears when the Phrase

Repeat function is on

Phrase number

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Performance

You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers

051–055). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument.

You can record your performance to the following two

tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously.

Track 1:

Your melody performance is recorded to this track.

Track 2:

Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord

changes and Section changes), is recorded to this

track.

Recording Data Capacity:

A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord

changes can be recorded to the five User Songs.

The operation is convenient for recording a new Song

without having to specify a track.

Make the desired settings such as Voice

and Style settings.

If you want to record only the melody perfor-

mance, turn ACMP off (page 24). If you want to

record Style playback as well as melody perfor-

mance, turn ACMP on (page 24).

Press the [REC] button to enable the

Record mode.

On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User

Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select

another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons.

To exit from the Record mode (and stop the flash-

ing indicators), press the [REC] button again.

Play the keyboard to start recording.

If ACMP is turned on, you can independently

record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by

pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing

the Section (page 25).

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

recording.

When using a Style, you can stop recording also

by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then

waiting until playback ends.

To play back the recorded Song, press

the [START/STOP] button.

Track Structure of a Song

Quick Recording

• If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1” will

automatically be selected. In this case, since you will

record over and erase any previous data in “User 1,”

we recommend that you save your important data as

a Backup File to a computer (see page 46).

• ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you

can select another Style in this status by using the

[STYLE] and Number buttons.

• After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown

on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the

power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so

can damage the internal memory and result in a loss

of data.

User 1

rEC

001

User Song Number

Flashes

NOTICE

NOTE

36 48

7260

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

Auto Accompani-

ment range

NOTICE

Recording Your Performance

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Make the desired settings, such as

those of Voice or Style.

If you want to record the melody performance,

turn ACMP off (page 24). If you want to record

Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 24).

While holding down the [REC] button,

press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to

engage the Record mode.

If you want to record Style playback, make sure to

select the Track 2. If you want to record melody

performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as

desired. The illustration below is the example

when selecting Track 2.

Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the

User Song you want to record.

If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for

example and Track 1 contains already recorded

data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning

on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will deter-

mine whether you listen to a previously recorded

Track or not while recording a new Track.

Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 37) in

“Quick Recording.”

Press the [SONG] button then select the

desired User Song by using the Number

buttons.

Press and hold the [REC] button for lon-

ger than a second.

A confirmation message appears.

To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message appears again.

To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the

Song.

A “Writing!” message appears while the track is

being cleared.

Recording to a specified track

Limitations while Recording

• You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome

click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings.

• The following settings and buttons are not available,

or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded:

ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus

Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] but-

ton, [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO] button.

001

User 1

rEC

Clearing a User Song

ClrUser1

YES

Hold for longer

than a second.

Sure?

YES

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Playing the Keyboard with Two People (Duo Mode)

When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the

instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one per-

son on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in

which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other per-

son watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side.

To start this instrument in the Duo

mode, simultaneously hold down the [L]

button and press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power.

“DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point

and the keyboard is divided into two sections:

one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice.

One person should play the left Voice

section of the keyboard while the other

plays the right Voice section.

Selecting a Voice

Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in

“Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16.

How sounds are output in the Duo mode

Notes played in the left Voice section sound from

the left side speaker while notes played in the

right Voice section sound from the right side

speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This out-

put setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut”

setting (Function 042; page 43).

Using sustain in the Duo mode

Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice

sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by

using one of the following methods in the Duo

mode like the usual mode.

• Press the foot switch (page 12) connected to the

[SUSTAIN] jack.

• Set “Sustain” (Function 038; page 43) to on.

Style Playback in the Duo mode

Although full Style features (accompaniment)

cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part

of a Style can be played back while playing the

left/right Voices normally.

Recording in the Duo mode

The right Voice section and the left Voice section

are recorded on the same track.

To exit from the Duo mode, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the

power, and turn the power back on again

normally.

• The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the

keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice).

• In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed

from F

• When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 142

to 168, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice.

• Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio

and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode.

DuoMode

Equivalent to C3

Split Point: 066 (F#3)

Left Voice

Equivalent to C3

Right Voice

NOTE

• In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteris-

tics of the stereo sound may differ from those in the nor-

mal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate”

(page 43). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference

may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit fea-

tures a different stereo pan position.

• Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left

Voice section and the right Voice section.

• While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is main-

tained even when the power is turned off.

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favor-

ite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be

memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9.

Make the desired settings such as those

for Voice and Style.

Press and hold down the [REGIST MEM-

ORY] button for longer than a second.

“MemNo.?” appears on the display.

Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to mem-

orize the current panel settings.

If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, an “Overwr?” message

appears in the display. To overwrite, press the

[+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO].

Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button.

“LoadNo.?” appears on the display.

Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call

up the panel settings you memorized.

The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears

in the display.

The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed

by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons.

Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-

tion Memory

Style settings*

Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Tempo,

Main A/B

Voice settings

Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of

the related Functions

Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of

the related Functions

Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the

related Functions



Effect settings:

Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type

Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/

off and all settings of the related Functions



Other settings:

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Split

Point, Touch Response on/off, Panel Sustain on/off,

Voice output

* When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be

recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style

settings can be recorded or called up.

Memorizing Panel Settings to

the Registration Memory

MemNo.?

Hold for longer

than a second.

• If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, the previous data is deleted

and overwritten by the new data.

• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings

to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may

be damaged or lost.

Recalling Panel Settings from

the Registration Memory

NOTICE

LoadNo.?

REGIST 1

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel set-

ups you’ve made with a single button press. However,

there may be times that you want certain items to

remain the same, even when switching Registration

Memory setups. When you want to switch the Voice

settings and the others but still maintain the Style set-

tings, you can “freeze” only the Style settings and

have those Style settings remain, even when you

select another Registration Memory number.

Hold down the [TOUCH] button for lon-

ger than a second so that “Freeze”

(Function 022; page 43) appears on the

display.

Use the [+] or [-] button to set the Freeze

function on/off.

When the Freeze function turned on, you can

“freeze” or maintain Style settings, even when

you select another Registration memory number.

Disabling recall of specific

items (Freeze)

Freeze

oFF

022

Hold for longer

than a second.

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters

such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects.

Press the [FUNCTION] button several

times until the desired item appears.

Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the

Function number increases one by one. To

decrease the Function number by one, simultane-

ously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and

press the [-] button briefly. To increase the Func-

tion number by one, simultaneously hold down

the [FUNCTION] button and press the [+] button

briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button

does not change the Function number.

After a few seconds, the Function name may be

replaced with the setting value depending on the

selected Function.

Set the value by using the number but-

tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Function List

• The Function number does not appear in the display

during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat

value appears instead.

StyleVol

100

001

Current value

Function number

Function name

NOTE

• To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons;

[SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE].

Direct numeric

entry.

•Increment

value by 1.

•Yes

•On

Press simultaneously

to recall the default

setting.

•Decrement

value by 1.

•No

•Off

NOTE

Function

Number

Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions

Vol ume

001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. (page 24)

002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 29)

003 AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 100

Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to

the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 32)

Overall

004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 00 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.

005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz

Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in

approx. 0.2Hz increments.

006 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 02 Determines the pitch bend range. (page 18)

007 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 054 (F#2)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split

“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)

and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-

ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.

008

Touch Response

Sensitivity

TouchRes

1 (Soft),

2 (Medium),

3 (Hard)

2 (Medium)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the

feature. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation

in response to keyboard dynamics.

Scale Tune (page 22)

009

Accompaniment

Tuning

TuneAcc ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether Scale Tuning is applied to the accompani-

ment or not.Use the [+] button to turn it on (apply it to the accom-

paniment) and [-] to turn it off.

010–021

Scale Tunings

(Tune C – Tune B)

Tune C

Tune B

-64–00–63 00 Determines the pitch of each note. (page 22)

The Functions

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory (page 41)

022 Registration Freeze Freeze ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether or not the Style settings are maintained when

you select another Registration memory number (page 41).

Style file

023 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn –

Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from

computer (page 26).

Main Voice (page 16)

024 Volume M.Volume 000–127 *

Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing

along with a Song or a Style.

025 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

026 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Dual Voice (page 17)

027 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–613 * Selects a Dual Voice.

028 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

029 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

030 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Split Voice (page 17)

031 Split Voice S.Voice 001–613 * Selects a Split Voice.

032 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

033 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

034 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Effects

035 Reverb Type Reverb

01–03 (Hall 1–3)

04–05 (Room 1–2)

06–07 (Stage 1–2)

08–09 (Plate 1–2)

10 (Off)

** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 76)

036 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64

Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

037 Chorus Type Chorus

1 (Chorus1)

2 (Chorus2)

3 (Chorus3)

4 (Flanger1)

5 (Flanger2)

6 (Off)

** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 76)

038 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off.

039 Master EQ Type MasterEQ

1 (Speaker)

2 (Headphone)

3 (Boost)

4 (Piano)

5 (Bright)

6 (Mild)

1 (Speaker)

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum

sound in different listening situations. (page 14)

040 Wide Type Wide

1 (Wide1)

2 (Wide2)

3 (Wide3)

2 (Wide2)

Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.

Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 14)

041 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 C

Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio

device to be canceled or lowered (page 32).

042 Voice Output VoiceOut

1 (Normal)

2 (Separate)

1 (Normal)

When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 39) is

on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance

sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the

left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the performance

sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, and the perfor-

mance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker.

Harmony/Arpeggio (page 20)

043

Harmony/Arpeggio

Ty pe

Harm/Arp

001–026 (Harmony)

027–178 (Arpeggio)

Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is

selected.

044 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

045 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo

1 (Original)

2 (Thru)

If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume

matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original”

is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume

regardless of your playing strength.

Function

Number

Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions

The Functions

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.

** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio.

046 Pedal Function Pdl Func

1 (Sustain)

2 (Arp Hold)

3 (Hold+Sus)

* Refer to the page 21.

Computer (page 45)

047 PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF

Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer

(page 45).

MIDI

048 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the inter-

nal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your key-

board performance to the application software on the computer

via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.

049 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal

clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your key-

board performance to the application software on the computer

via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.

050 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO –

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/

YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done

immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer.

Metronome (page 19)

051

Time Signature

Numerator

TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

052

Time Signature

Denominator

TimeSigD

Half note, Quarter

note, Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

** Determines the length of each metronome beat.

053 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson (page 33)

054 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 01

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred

from a computer.

055 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The

setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from

a computer.

056 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON

This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON,

playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are play-

ing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained

regardless of the speed you are playing at.

Demo (page 29)

057 Demo Group DemoGrp

1 (Demo)

2 (Preset)

3 (User)

4 (Download)

1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group.

058 Demo Play Mode PlayMode

1 (Normal)

2 (Random)

1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode.

059 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is

set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button

is pressed.

Auto Power Off (page 13)

060 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff

OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/

120 (minutes)

30 minutes

Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is

automatically turned off.

Battery (page 11)

061 Battery Type Battery

1 (Alkaline)

2 (Ni-MH)

1 (Alkaline)

Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument.

Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery

Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery

Function

Number

Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions

The Functions

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

PC Mode (FUNCTION 047)

The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below).

* An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use.

** Cannot be set independently.

PC1 PC2* OFF

LOCAL Off Off On

EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off

MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes

MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes

MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes

• MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs.

NOTE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad

This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument

Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard

performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/

Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer con-

nected via a USB cable. For details on using a com-

puter with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-

related Operations” (page 2) on the website.

By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument,

you can take advantage of various functions. To

make connections, then refer to the “iPhone/iPad

Connection Manual” (page 2) on the website.

Backup and Initialization

The following Backup parameters will be maintained

even if the power is turned off.

In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the

data (including Style data that have not been loaded)

transferred from the connected computer will be

maintained even if you turn off the power.

You can initialize your original data via the following

two methods.

Backup Clear

This operation initializes the backup parameters.

While holding down the highest white key, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

Flash Clear

This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that

have been transferred from a computer. Note that

Style data registered to Style numbers 211–220 will

be maintained. While simultaneously holding the

highest white key and the three highest black keys,

press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power

on.

Connecting to a computer

• If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instru-

ment, you need to register it to this instrument for Style play-

back. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on

page 26.

USB cable

USB

terminal

instrumentcomputer

USB

terminal

NOTE

Data that can be transferred from a computer to

this instrument (and vice versa).

• Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1

• Style: (.sty)

• Backup File: PSR-A350.BUP *

* Backup parameters (as described below) other than

“Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred

and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a

single Backup file.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

• This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256

Song files.

NOTE

Backup Parameters

Backup parameters

• User Songs 1–5 (page 37)

• Style Numbers 211–220 (page 26)

• Scale Tune Memory (page 23)

• Registration Memory (page 40)

• Passing status of Song and Step (page 34)

• Touch Response on/off

• FUNCTION Settings: (page 42)

Style Volume, Song Volume, Tuning, Pitch Bend

Range, Split Point, Touch Response Sensitivity,

Accompaniment Tuning, Scale Tunings, Registration

Freeze, Panel Sustain, Master EQ Type, Metronome

Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play

Mode, Demo Cancel, Auto Power Off, Battery Type

Initialization

• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you

have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a

computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For

details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 2).

NOTICE

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce inter-

ference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from

the instrument.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or head-

phones when using the instrument with the application

on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch.

When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/

iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or

when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear

panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 44 Function 048.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does

not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 28), the keys in the right hand area

are used only for entering the chord root and type.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems

to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual

voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.

Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.

The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the

selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it

by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then

play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–

26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is neces-

sary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.

The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to

“Function Settings” on page 44 (Function 049).

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

• Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-

related function.

• The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on.

The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 42 Function 001) is set to an appropri-

ate level.

Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set

the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 42 Function 007).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords

are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor sev-

enth).

• Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-

ment based only on the root.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-

site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off

the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is

properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual

sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new

ones, or use the included AC adaptor.

Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated

(page 13). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in

the Function settings (Function 060; page 44).

When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off

suddenly and unexpectedly.

This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power

may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly.

Appendix

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Specifications

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then

download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your

Yamaha dealer.

Size/Weight

Dimensions (W x D x H) 945mm x 369mm x 122mm(37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”)

Weight 4.6Kg (10lbs., 2oz.) (not including batteries)

Control Interface

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61

Touch Response On (Hard/Medium/Soft) / Off

Other Controllers Pitch Bend Wheel Yes

Display

Type LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

Backlight Yes

Language English

Voice s

Tone Generation

Tone Generation Technology

AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony 32 (max.)

Preset Number of Voices

221 Voices + 33 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices

(including 45 Oriental Voices + 19 Oriental Percussion)

Compatibility GM, XGlite

Effects

Ty pe s

Reverb 9 types

Chorus 5 types

Master EQ 6 types

Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types

Harmony 26 types

Arpeggio 152 types

Functions

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Panel Sustain Yes

Melody Suppressor Yes (for AUX IN)

Accompaniment

Styles

Preset

Number of Styles 210 (including 115 Oriental Styles)

Fingering Multi Finger

Style Control

ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

External Styles Yes

Other Features One Touch Setting (OTS) Yes

Compatibility Style File Format (SFF)

Songs

(MIDI data only;

audio not

supported.)

Preset Number of Preset Songs 50

Recording

Number of Songs 5

Number of Tracks 2

Data Capacity Approx. 10,000 notes

Format

Playback SMF (Format 0, Format 1)

Recording Original File Format

Functions

Registration

Memory

Number of Buttons 9

Control Freeze

Lesson/Guide

[KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING],

[PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY]

Overall Controls

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 11 – 280, Tap Tempo

Transpose -12 – 0 – +12

Tuning 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)

Duo Yes

Scale Setting Yes

Scale Memory Yes

Miscellaneous PIANO Button Yes (Oriental Instrument/Piano Button)

Storage and

Connectivity

Storage Internal Memory Total maximum size approx. 1.26 MB

Connectivity

DC IN 12 V

Headphones/Output Standard stereo phone jack (PHONES/OUTPUT)

Sustain Pedal Yes

AUX IN Stereo mini jack

USB TO HOST Yes

Sound System

Amplifiers 2.5 W x 2

Speakers 12 cm x 2

Power Supply

Adaptor

Users within Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent

Batteries

Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries

Power Consumption 8W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor)

Auto Power Off Yes

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

• AC Adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

• Music rest

• Online Member Product Registration

* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with

your Yamaha dealer.

Separately Sold Accessories

(May not be available depending on your area.)

• AC Adaptor:

Users within Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C

• Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/HPH-50

• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5

• Wireless MIDI Adaptor: UD-BT01

PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual

Index

A-B Repeat ................................31

AC Adaptor

................................10

Accompaniment Tuning

.......23, 42

ACMP

........................................24

Arpeggio

....................................20

Arpeggio Type

...............20, 43, 75

Arpeggio Velocity

................21, 43

Auto Accompaniment

................24

AUTO FILL

................................25

Auto Power Off

....................13, 44

AUX IN

........................................9

AUX IN Volume

.........................42

Background music .....................30

Backup

......................................46

Backup Clear

.............................46

Backup Parameters

...................46

Battery

....................................... 11

Battery Type

........................ 11, 44

Beat

...........................................15

Chord ........................................15

Chord Dictionary

.......................28

Chord Type

..........................27, 28

Chorus

.......................................19

Chorus Type

........................43, 76

Computer

...................................46

Computer-related Operations

......2

Demo .........................................29

Demo Cancel

............................44

Demo Group

..............................44

Demo Play Mode

.......................44

Display

......................................15

Drum Kit List

..............................66

Dual Voice

...........................17, 43

Duo

............................................39

Effect ................................... 19, 43

Effect Type List

..........................74

ENDING

....................................25

EQ Setting

.................................14

External Clock

...........................44

Fast Forward .............................30

Fast Reverse

.............................30

Flash Clear

................................46

Footswitch

...........................12, 21

Freeze

.................................41, 43

Function

...............................15, 42

Function List

..............................42

GM System Level 1 .....................4

Grade

........................................35

Grand Piano

.............................. 16

Harmony ...................................20

Harmony Type

..........20, 21, 43, 74

Harmony Volume

................ 21, 43

Headphones

............................. 12

Initial Send ................................44

Initialization

...............................46

INTRO

....................................... 25

iPad

...........................................46

iPhone

.......................................46

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

Keyboard Display ...................... 15

Keys to Success

........................ 33

Lesson ...................................... 15

Listening

.............................. 33, 35

Local Control

.............................44

MAIN .........................................25

Main Voice

.......................... 16, 43

Master EQ Type

.................. 14, 43

Measure

.................................... 15

Melody Suppressor

...................32

Metronome

................................ 19

Metronome Volume

............. 19, 44

MIDI Basics

.................................2

MIDI Reference

...........................2

Music Rest

..................................2

Musicsoft Downloader

...............26

Notation .................................... 15

One Touch Setting .................... 16

ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO

.16

Oriental Scales

.......................... 22

Panel Sustain ...................... 19, 43

Part

...........................................31

Passing Status

.......................... 34

Pause

........................................30

PC Mode

............................. 44, 45

Pedal Function

..........................44

Phrase Repeat

.................... 33, 36

Pitch Bend Range

............... 18, 42

Pitch Bend wheel

...................... 18

Playback

............................. 29, 30

Power Requirements

................. 10

Random ....................................30

Recording Data Capacity

.......... 37

Registration Memory

................ 40

Reverb

...................................... 19

Reverb Level

............................. 43

Reverb Type

.........................43, 76

rhythm

....................................... 24

rit.

.............................................. 25

SCALE MEMORY ..................... 23

SCALE SETTING

..................... 22

Scale Tuning

....................... 22, 42

Section

...................................... 25

Song

......................................... 29

Song Book

............................ 2, 33

Song Book Sample

................... 50

Song Category

.......................... 29

Song List

................................... 71

Song Volume

...................... 29, 42

Specifications

........................... 48

Split

........................................... 17

Split Point

.......................17, 24, 42

Split Voice

............................17, 43

Style

......................................... 24

Style File

............................... 4, 26

Style List

................................... 72

Style Register

........................... 43

Style Volume

....................... 24, 42

SUSTAIN

.................................. 12

Sustain

...........................19, 39, 43

Synchro Start

............................ 24

Tap ............................................ 26

Tem po

..................................19, 26

Time Signature

....................19, 44

Timing

................................. 33, 35

Touch Response

....................... 18

Touch Response Sensitivity

.18, 42

Tra ck

....................................15, 37

Transpose

................................. 42

Troubleshooting

........................ 47

Tuning

....................................... 42

Ultra-Wide Stereo ..................... 14

USB

............................................ 4

USB TO HOST

........................... 9

User Song

................................. 37

Voice ......................................... 16

Voice List

.................................. 60

Waiting ................................ 33, 35

Wide Type

................................. 43

XGlite .......................................... 4

Your Tempo ............................... 44

PSR-A350

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de

morceaux / Song Book Örneği

This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).

The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–5) but also music terms and

important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.

Diese Partitur ist im Notenheft enthalten (kostenlos herunterladbare Partituren).

Neben den Partituren für die vorprogrammierten Songs (ausgenommen Songs 1–5) enthält das Notenheft auch

Musikbegriffe und hilfreiche Hinweise für Ihre Übungen. Um das Notenheft zu erhalten, füllen Sie die

Anwenderregistrierung auf der folgenden Webseite aus.

Cette partition est fournie dans le recueil de morceaux (partitions téléchargeables gratuitement).

Le recueil de morceaux contient non seulement les partitions de l'ensemble des morceaux internes (à l'exception des

morceaux 1–5), mais également la terminologie musicale et les points essentiels pour vous exercer. Pour obtenir le recueil

de morceaux, remplissez la fiche d’enregistrement utilisateur, accessible via le site Web suivant :

Bu nota şarkı kitabı (ücretsiz indirilebilen notalar) ile birlikte verilir. Şarkı kitabı (Şarkı 1-5 hariç) tüm dahili şarkıların yanı

sıra, müzik terimlerini ve pratik yapmanız için gereken en önemli noktaları da içerir. Song Book (Şarkı Kitabı) yayınını

edinmek için aşağıdaki web sitesinde kullanıcı kaydını tamamlayın.

* The Song book is provided only in English.

* Das Notenheft ist nur auf Englisch vorhanden.

* Song Book est disponible uniquement en anglais.

* Şarkı kitabı yalnızca İngilizce dilinde sağlanır.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

Für Elise

Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.

The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.

In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!

First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!

Für Elise With Step Map

.......................................................................12

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................15

Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” ..................................... 16

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................16

First Half Review ......................................................................17

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................17

Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” ....................................18

“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18

“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19

Second Half Review ...................................................................19

Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19

L. v. Beethoven

Song No.006

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Before Playing...

Sit Correctly Finger Numbering

Left Right

Sit near the middle of the keyboard.

Reading the Score

The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef

BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDE FGACC

Treble clef

Bass clef

Time Signatures and Counting Time

4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time

3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time

1 octave

2 black keys 3 black keys

Accidentals



(Sharp) Raise a semitone

B

(Flat) Lower a semitone

N

(Natural) Return to normal pitch

Key signature

Clef

Time signature

Notes and Rests

Whole note

Dotted half note

Half note

Dotted quarter note

Quarter note

Eighth note

Sixteenth note





Whole note rest

Dotted half note rest

Half note rest

Dotted quarter note rest

Quarter note rest

Eighth note rest

Sixteenth note rest

























1234

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006

Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.

Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as

you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proﬁciency.

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

With Step Map

From here...

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

...to here From here...

...to here

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”

Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three ﬁngers of the right hand.

We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the

illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get

started!

You’ll ﬁnd it easier to play if you bend your ﬁngers slightly.

Right

Tip-toe

ABCD

A E

Go back to the beginning and play it again.

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

Diligent Practice Time

Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.

The melody will be built up little by little.

Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.

Short break

Almost done

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”

And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.

It’s important to spread your ﬁngers widely from the start.

Don’t play the black keys too strongly.

Left hand

AEAE

Diligent Practice Time

Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play

smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it ﬁnishes playing the ﬁrst

phrase.

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

Diligent Practice Time

OK, let’s begin the second half!

You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your ﬁngers from the keyboard between the slurs.

It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.

Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.

First Half Review

You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?

Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble

playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.

Always have left-hand ﬁnger 5 ready to play the next note!

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

EEE

Jump to the

next E!

And again!

Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”

The ﬁrst note has a staccato dot.

Spread your ﬁngers wide and jump quickly to the next note!

Left hand

“EEEEE!”

The only note in this step is E!

Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.

Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği

PSR-A350

Song No.006 Für Elise Basic

Left

Right

“Left! Right! Left! Right!”

Play “D



E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.

Have the next hand ready in position to play D



so you won’t have to rush.

Second Half Review

Try playing all the way through the second half.

As we did after the ﬁrst half, if there are places you can’t play with conﬁdence go back and review the steps.

Play the Whole Song!

This is the ﬁnishing step!

Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.

Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.

PSR-A350

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi

Listesi

Maximum Polyphony

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless

of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number

of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the

total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is

correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice

and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded,

earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes

have priority (last note priority).

Maximale Polyphonie

Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von 32

Noten. Dies bedeutet, dass das Instrument unabhängig von den

aktivierten Funktionen maximal 32 Noten gleichzeitig spielen

kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten wird von

der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Einsatz

verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der Tastatur

erfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Dasselbe gilt für die Song-

Funktionen. Wenn die maximale Polyphonie überschritten wird,

werden die am frühesten gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und

die zuletzt gespielten Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority).

Polyphonie maximale

Le PSR-A350 dispose d'une polyphonie maximale de 32 notes.

Cela signifie que l'instrument peut reproduire un nombre

maximal de 32 sonorités à la fois, indépendamment des

fonctions utilisées. L'accompagnement automatique fait appel à

un certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s'ensuit que lorsque

l'accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de

notes disponibles pour l'interprétation au clavier est réduit en

conséquence. Cela s'applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice

(Sonorités partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie

maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne

produisent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier

sont audibles (priorité à la dernière note).

En Fazla Polifoni Sayısı

Enstrümanda en fazla 32 notalık polifoni bulunur. Bu, hangi işlev

kullanılırsa kullanılsın enstrümanın bir kerede en fazla 32 nota

çalabileceği anlamına gelir. Otomatik eşlik, mevcut belirli bir

sayıdaki notayı kullanır; böylece otomatik eşlik kullanıldığında,

klavyedeki çalınabilir notaların toplam sayısı buna paralel olarak

azaltılır. Aynısı Ses Ayırma ve Şarkı işlevleri için de geçerlidir.

En fazla polifoni sayısı aşılırsa, daha önceden çalınmış notalar

kesilir ve en son notalara öncelik verilir (son nota önceliği).

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each

voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the

instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program

Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Pro-

gram Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take

this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after

the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)

is held.

NOTE

• In der Liste der Voices sind für jede Voice MIDI-

Programmwechsel- Nummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese

Programmwechsel-Nummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über

MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern.

• Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direct mit den MIDI-

Programmwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127 zusammen. Das

bedeutet: Programmnummern und Programmwechsel-Nummern

unterscheiden sich mit einem Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen

Überlegungen daran.

• Solange der Sustain-Fußschalter gedrückt ist, ertönen einige

Voices nach dem Loslassen der Taste eventuell kontinuierlich

oder mit einer langen Abklingzeit (Decay).

HINWEIS

• La liste des sonorités comporte des numéros de changement de

programme MIDI pour chaque sonorité. Utilisez ces derniers

pour commander le PSR-A350 à partir d'un périphérique MIDI.

• Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux

numéros de changement de programme MIDI 000 à 127. Cela

signifie que les numéros de programme et les numéros de

changement de programme sont décalés de 1. N'oubliez pas de

tenir compte de cet écart.

• Certaines sonorités peuvent avoir une sonorité prolongée ou un

long déclin après le relâchement des touches, et ceci pendant la

durée de maintien de la pédale de sustain (sélecteur au pied).

NOTE

• Ses Listesi her bir ses için MIDI program değişim numaralarını

içerir. Enstrümanı MIDI aracılığıyla harici bir cihazdan çalarken bu

program değişim numaralarını kullanın.

• 001 ila 128 arasındaki Program Numaraları doğrudan 000 ila 127

arasındaki MIDI Program Değişim Numaraları ile ilgilidir. Yani,

Program Numaraları ve Program Değişim Numaraları arasındaki

fark değeri 1'dir. Bunu dikkate almayı unutmayın.

• Uzatma pedalı (ayak pedalı) basılı tutulurken, notalar bırakıldıktan

sonra bazı sesler sürekli devam edebilir veya uzun süreli gecikme

yaşanabilir.

NOT

PSR-A350

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi

Panel Voice List / Liste der Bedienfeld-Voices /

Liste des sonorités de panneau / Panel Ses Listesi

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

1 0 112 1 Grand Piano

2 0 112 2 Bright Piano

3 0 112 7 Harpsichord

4 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

6 0 113 3 CP80

E.PIANO

7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines

9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano

10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

12 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ

14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ

15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

17 0 112 19 Rock Organ

18 0 114 19 Purple Organ

19 0 112 18 Click Organ

20 0 116 17 Bright Organ

21 0 127 19 Theater Organ

22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ

23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ

24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

25 0 112 20 Pipe Organ

26 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

29 0 113 24 Bandoneon

30 0 113 23 Modern Harp

31 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

32 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar

33 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven

34 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

35 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

36 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

37 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar

38 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

39 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

40 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

41 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

42 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

43 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

44 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass

45 0 112 34 Finger Bass

46 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

47 0 112 35 Pick Bass

48 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

49 0 112 37 Slap Bass

50 0 121 40 Funk Bass

51 0 112 39 Synth Bass

52 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

53 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

54 0 112 49 Strings

55 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

56 0 115 50 Marcato Strings

57 0 113 50 Slow Strings

58 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

59 0 112 51 Synth Strings

60 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

61 0 112 41 Violin

62 0 112 43 Cello

63 0 112 44 Contrabass

64 0 112 47 Harp

65 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

66 0 112 53 Choir

67 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

68 0 112 55 Air Choir

69 0 112 54 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

70 0 117 67 Tenor Sax 1

71 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 2

72 0 112 66 Alto Sax

73 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

74 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

75 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

76 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble

77 0 112 72 Clarinet

78 0 112 69 Oboe

79 0 112 70 English Horn

80 0 112 71 Bassoon

TRUMPET

81 0 112 57 Trumpet

82 0 112 58 Trombone

83 0 113 58 Trombone Section

84 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

85 0 112 61 French Horn

86 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

87 0 112 62 Brass Section

88 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

89 0 116 62 Octave Brass

90 0 113 63 80s Brass

91 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

92 0 115 63 Funky Brass

93 0 114 63 Techno Brass

94 0 112 63 Synth Brass

FLUTE

95 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute

96 0 112 74 Flute

97 0 112 73 Piccolo

98 0 112 76 Pan Flute

99 0 112 75 Recorder

100 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH

101 0 112 81 Square Lead

102 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

103 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw

104 0 112 88 Under Heim

105 0 112 85 Portatone

106 0 115 82 Analogon

107 0 119 82 Fargo

108 0 112 86 Voice Lead

109 0 121 82 Funky Lead

110 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven

111 0 121 89 Dream Heaven

112 0 113 8 9 Symbiont

113 0 112 99 Stardust

114 0 112 101 Brig ht n e ss

115 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

116 0 112 95 Equinox

117 0 112 89 Fantasia

118 0 113 9 0 Dark Moon

119 0 113 101 Be l l Pad

120 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad

121 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance

PERCUSSION

122 0 112 12 Vibraphone

123 0 112 13 Marimba

124 0 112 14 Xylophone

125 0 112 115 Steel Dr ums

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-A350

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi

126 0 112 9 Celesta

127 0 112 11 Music Box

128 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

129 0 112 48 Timpani

WORLD

130 0 112 106 Banjo

131 0 0 111 Fiddle

132 0 0 110 Bagpipe

133 0 0 16 Dulcimer

134 0 96 16 Cimbalom

135 0 0 109 Kalimba

136 0 0 105 Sitar

137 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

138 0 0 12 Shehnai

139 0 40 47 Yang Qin

140 0 0 107 Shamisen

141 0 0 108 Koto

DUAL*

142–––Octave Piano

143 – – – Piano & Strings

144–––Piano Pad

145 – – – Octave Harpsichord

146 – – – Tiny Electric Piano

147 – – – Electric Piano Pad

148–––Full Organ

149 – – – Octave Jazz Guitar

150–––Octave Strings

151 – – – Orchestra Section

152 – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings

153 – – – Strings Session

154–––Brass Tutti

155 – – – Orchestra Tutti

156–––Octave French Horns

157–––Octave Harp

158 – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani

159–––Octave Choir

160 – – – Jazz Brass Section

161 – – – Jazz Section

162 – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble

163 – – – Ballroom Brass

164 – – – Flute & Clarinet

165 – – – Trumpet & Trombone

166 – – – Fat Synth Brass

167–––Octave Lead

168 – – – Super 5th Lead

SOUND EFFECTS

169 0 0 121 Fret Noise

170 0 0 122 Breath Noise

171 0 0 123 Seashore

172 0 0 124 Bird Tweet

173 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

174 0 0 126 Helicopter

175 0 0 127 Applause

176 0 0 128 Gunshot

DRUM KITS

177 126 0 76 Arabic Kit 1

178 126 0 78 Arabic Kit 2

179 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 3

180 126 0 65 Arabic Mix Kit

181 126 0 73 Khaligi Kit 1

182 126 0 74 Khaligi Kit 2

183 126 0 38 Khaligi Kit 3

184 126 0 66 Khaligi Mix Kit

185 126 0 75 Maghrebi Kit

186 126 0 77 Iranian Kit 1

187 126 0 79 Iranian Kit 2

188 126 0 10 Turkish Kit 1

189 126 0 11 Turkish Kit 2

190 126 0 12 Turkish Kit 3

191 126 0 13 Turkish Kit 4

192 126 0 14 2 Telli Kit

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

193 126 0 15 Ankara Kit

194 126 0 17 Azeri Kit

195 126 0 19 Davul Mix Kit

196 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

197 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

198 127 0 9 Room Kit

199 127 0 17 Rock Kit

200 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

201 127 0 26 Analog Kit

202 127 0 113 Dance Kit

203 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

204 127 0 41 Brush Kit

205 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

206 126 0 41 Cuban Kit

207 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

208 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

209 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit

ARPEGGIO**

210 – – – Arabic Left

211 – – – Khaligi Left

212 – – – Maghrebi Left

213 – – – Iranian Left

214 – – – Turkish Left

215 – – – Finger Bass Left

216 – – – Combo Jazz Left

217 – – – Paul's Bass Left

218 – – – Trance Bass Left

219 – – – Piano Ballad Left

220 – – – Piano Arpeggio Left

221 – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left

222 – – – Strum Left

223 – – – Concerto

224 – – – Brass Section

225 – – – Piano Ballad

226 – – – Synth Sequence

227 – – – Pickin'

228 – – – Spanish

229 – – – Funky Clavi

ORIENTAL

230 0 113 106 Oud

231 0 115 106 Oud Tremolo

232 0 114 78 Nay

233 0 116 78 Nay Takasim

234 0 113 78 Kawala

235 0 113 108 Kanoun

236 0 116 108 Kanoun Tremolo

237 0 121 26 Saz

238 0 114 112 Surnay

239 0 123 26 Bouzouki

240 0 113 16 Santoor

241 0 115 41 Rababa

242 0 122 26 Bouzouk

243 0 116 106 Baglamas

244 0 117 106 Awtar

245 0 118 106 Awtar Tremolo

246 0 122 112 Sorna

247 0 114 106 Tar

248 0 114 16 Santuri

249 0 114 41 Kamanche

250 0 117 112 Gerba

251 0 121 112 Gerba Chorus

252 0 112 112 Dosaleh

253 0 115 112 Mijwez

254 0 116 112 Mizmar

255 0 119 112 Mizmar Oct.

256 0 120 112 Al Badou

257 0 118 112 Argoul

258 0 124 22 Accordion

259 0 125 49 Watariyat 1

260 0 127 49 Watariyat 2

261 0 114 46 Pizzicato

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-A350

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi

* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices

sound at the same time.

**Selecting a Voice number between 210 and 229 will turn on

Arpeggio.

* Wenn Sie eine Voice der DUAL-Kategorie auswählen,

erklingen zwei Voices gleichzeitig.

**Wenn Sie eine Voice-Nummer zwischen 210 und 229

wählen, wird das Arpeggio eingeschaltet.

* Lorsque vous sélectionnez une sonorité de la catégorie

DUAL (Duo), deux sonorités retentissent en même temps.

**La sélection d'un numéro de sonorité compris entre210

et229 entraîne l'activation de l'arpège.

* DUAL kategorisinden bir Ses seçtiğinizde, iki ses aynı anda

seslendirilir.

**210 ile 229 arasında bir Ses numarası seçmek Arpej

özelliğini otomatik olarak açar.

XGlite Voice List / Liste der XGlite-Voices /

Liste des sonorités XGlite / XGlite Ses Listesi

262 0 110 81 Solo 1

263 0 107 81 Solo 2

264 0 108 81 Solo 3

265 0 122 63 Brass

266 0 127 112 Zurna

267 0 113 71 Balaban

268 0 125 22 Garmon

269 0 111 49 Yayli

270 0 126 106 AkustikBaglama

271 0 125 106 Ud

272 0 121 111 Kemence

273 0 117 72 Klarnet

274 0 123 74 Kaval

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG PIANO

275 0 0 1 Grand Piano

276 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

277 0 40 1 Piano Strings

278 0 41 1 Dream

279 0 0 2 Bright Piano

280 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

281 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

282 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

283 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

284 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

285 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

286 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

287 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

288 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

289 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

290 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

291 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

292 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

293 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1

294 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

295 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2

296 0 0 8 Clavi

297 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

XG CHROMATIC

298 0 0 9 Celesta

299 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

300 0 0 11 Music Box 1

301 0 64 11 Music Box 2

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

302 0 0 12 Vibraphone

303 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

304 0 0 13 Marimba

305 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

306 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

307 0 97 13 Balimba

308 0 98 13 Log Drums

309 0 0 14 Xylophone

310 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

311 0 96 15 Church Bells

312 0 97 15 Carillon

XG ORGAN

313 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1

314 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

315 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1

316 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2

317 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1

318 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3

319 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ

320 0 64 17 Organ Bass

321 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2

322 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

323 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2

324 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1

325 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ

326 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

327 0 33 18 Light Organ

328 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

329 0 0 19 Rock Organ

330 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

331 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ

332 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ

333 0 0 20 Church Organ 1

334 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

335 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

336 0 40 20 Notre Dame

337 0 64 20 Organ Flute

338 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

339 0 0 21 Reed Organ

340 0 40 21 Puff Organ

341 0 0 22 Accordion

342 0 0 23 Harmonica 1

343 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

344 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1

345 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

XG GUITAR

346 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1

347 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3

348 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

349 0 96 25 Ukulele

350 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

351 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

352 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

353 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

354 0 96 26 Mandolin

355 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

356 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

357 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

358 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

359 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

360 0 40 29 Funk Guitar

361 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

362 0 45 29 Jazz Man

363 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

364 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

365 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

366 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1

367 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

368 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1

369 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

370 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-A350

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi

XG BASS

371 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

372 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

373 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

374 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1

375 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark

376 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

377 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

378 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

379 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

380 0 0 35 Pick Bass

381 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

382 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1

383 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

384 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

385 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

386 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

387 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

388 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

389 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

390 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

391 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

392 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

393 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

394 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

395 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

396 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

397 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

398 0 41 40 DX Bass

XG STRINGS

399 0 0 41 Violin

400 0 8 41 Slow Violin

401 0 0 42 Viola

402 0 0 43 Cello

403 0 0 44 Contrabass

404 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

405 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

406 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

407 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

408 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

409 0 0 48 Timpani

XG ENSEMBLE

410 0 0 49 Strings 1

411 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

412 0 8 49 Slow Strings

413 0 35 49 60s Strings

414 0 40 49 Orchestra 1

415 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

416 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

417 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

418 0 0 50 Strings 2

419 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

420 0 8 50 Legato Strings

421 0 40 50 Warm Strings

422 0 41 50 Kingdom

423 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

424 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4

425 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

426 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

427 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

428 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

429 0 40 53 Choir Strings

430 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

431 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1

432 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

433 0 41 55 Choral

434 0 64 55 Analog Voice

435 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1

436 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

437 0 64 56 Impact

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG BRASS

438 0 0 57 Trumpet

439 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

440 0 0 58 Trombone 1

441 0 18 58 Trombone 2

442 0 0 59 Tuba

443 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

444 0 0 61 French Horn 1

445 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

446 0 32 61 French Horn 2

447 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

448 0 0 62 Brass Section

449 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

450 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

451 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

452 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

453 0 18 64 Soft Brass

454 0 41 64 Choir Brass

XG REED

455 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

456 0 0 66 Alto Sax

457 0 40 66 Sax Section

458 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

459 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

460 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

461 0 0 69 Oboe

462 0 0 70 English Horn

463 0 0 71 Bassoon

464 0 0 72 Clarinet

XG PIPE

465 0 0 73 Piccolo

466 0 0 74 Flute

467 0 0 75 Recorder

468 0 0 76 Pan Flute

469 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

470 0 0 79 Whistle

471 0 0 80 Ocarina

XG SYNTH LEAD

472 0 0 81 Square Lead 1

473 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

474 0 8 81 LM Square

475 0 18 81 Hollow

476 0 19 81 Shroud

477 0 64 81 Mellow

478 0 65 81 Solo Sine

479 0 66 81 Sine Lead

480 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1

481 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

482 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

483 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

484 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

485 0 20 82 Big Lead

486 0 24 82 Heavy Synth

487 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

488 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

489 0 65 83 Pure Lead

490 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

491 0 0 85 Charang Lead

492 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

493 0 0 86 Voice Lead

494 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

495 0 35 87 Big Five

496 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

497 0 16 88 Big & Low

498 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

499 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

XG SYNTH PAD

500 0 0 89 New Age Pad

501 0 64 89 Fantasy

502 0 0 90 Warm Pad

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-A350

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi

503 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

504 0 0 92 Choir Pad

505 0 66 92 Itopia

506 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

507 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

508 0 0 95 Halo Pad

509 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

XG SYNTH EFFECTS

510 0 0 97 Rain

511 0 64 97 Harmo Rain

512 0 65 97 African Wind

513 0 66 97 Carib

514 0 0 98 Sound Track

515 0 27 98 Prologue

516 0 0 99 Crystal

517 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

518 0 14 99 Popcorn

519 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

520 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

521 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

522 0 41 99 Clear Bells

523 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

524 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

525 0 70 99 Air Bells

526 0 71 99 Bell Harp

527 0 72 99 Gamelimba

528 0 0 100 Atmosphere

529 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

530 0 19 100 Hollow Release

531 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

532 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

533 0 65 100 Harp Vox

534 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

535 0 0 101 Brightness

536 0 0 102 Goblins

537 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

538 0 65 102 Creeper

539 0 67 102 Ritual

540 0 68 102 To Heaven

541 0 70 102 Night

542 0 71 102 Glisten

543 0 96 102 Bell Choir

544 0 0 103 Echoes

545 0 65 103 Big Pan

546 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

XG WORLD

547 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

548 0 97 105 Tamboura

549 0 0 106 Banjo

550 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

551 0 97 106 Gopichant

552 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

XG PERCUSSIVE

553 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

554 0 96 113 Bonang

555 0 97 113 Altair

556 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

557 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

558 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

559 0 0 114 Agogo

560 0 0 115 Steel Drums

561 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

562 0 98 115 Thai Bells

563 0 0 116 Woodblock

564 0 96 116 Castanets

565 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

566 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

567 0 0 118 Melodic Tom

568 0 65 118 Real Tom

569 0 66 118 Rock Tom

570 0 0 119 Synth Drum

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

571 0 64 119 Analog Tom

572 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

573 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

XG SOUND EFFECTS

574 64 0 1 Cutting Noise

575 64 0 4 String Slap

576 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

577 64 0 33 Shower

578 64 0 34 Thunder

579 64 0 35 Wind

580 64 0 36 Stream

581 64 0 37 Bubble

582 64 0 38 Feed

583 64 0 49 Dog

584 64 0 50 Horse

585 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

586 64 0 56 Maou

587 64 0 65 Phone Call

588 64 0 66 Door Squeak

589 64 0 67 Door Slam

590 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

591 64 0 69 Scratch Split

592 64 0 70 Wind Chime

593 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

594 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

595 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

596 64 0 83 Car Passing

597 64 0 84 Car Crash

598 64 0 85 Siren

599 64 0 86 Train

600 64 0 87 Jet Plane

601 64 0 88 Starship

602 64 0 89 Burst

603 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

604 64 0 91 Submarine

605 64 0 97 Laugh

606 64 0 98 Scream

607 64 0 99 Punch

608 64 0 100 Heartbeat

609 64 0 101 Footsteps

610 64 0 113 Machine Gun

611 64 0 114 Laser Gun

612 64 0 115 Explosion

613 64 0 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voic e Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-A350

Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion /

Davul Seti Listesi

• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard

Note # and Note. For example, in “196: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click

H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

• “ ” bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeug-Sound dem des „Standard

Kit 1“ entspricht.

• Jede Percussion-Voice belegt eine Note.

• MIDI-Note # und MIDI Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Oktave tiefer als

hier aufgeführt. Im „196: Standard Kit 1“ beispielsweise entspricht „Seq

Click H“ (Note# 36/Note C1) den Werten (Note# 24/Note C0).

Voice No. 196 197 198 199 200 201 202

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026 127/000/113

Keyboard MIDI

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2

Snare Rock H Snare L Snare Rock H Analog Snare Snappy

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H

Analog Bass Drum Dance 1

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2 Abalog Snare Open Rim

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard

Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Analog L

Analog Bass Drum Dance 2

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2 Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog H

Analog Bass Drum Dance 3

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Rock L Analog Snare 1 Analog Snare Q

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 Snare Room H Snare Rock Rim Snare Rock H Analog Snare 2 Analog Snare + Acoustic

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L

Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Electronic Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed

Analog Hi-Hat Closed 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H

Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 1Hi-Hat Pedal

Analog Hi-Hat Closed 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom

Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 1Hi-Hat Open

Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L

Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 Electronic Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H

Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1

Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom

Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H Analog Conga H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

Analog Conga M Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Analog Conga L Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

Scratch Pull Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Voice Numbers 196–209: page 66

Voice Numbers 177–195: page 68

Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi

PSR-A350

• « » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à

celles de « Standard Kit 1 ».

• Chaque sonorité de percussion utilise une note unique.

• Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à

une octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple,

dans « 196 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1)

correspond à (Note# 24/Note C0).

• davul sesinin "Standard Kit 1" (Standard Set 1) ile aynı olduğunu

gösterir.

• Her perküsyon sesi bir nota kullanır.

•MIDI Notası # ve Nota, aslında klavye Notası # ve Nota’dan bir oktav

daha düşüktür. Örneğin, “196: Standard Kit 1", "Seq Click H" (Nota# 36/

Nota C1), (Nota# 24/Nota C0) değerine karşılık gelir.

203 204 205 206 209 Voice No. 207 208

127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/041 126/000/113 MSB / LSB / PC 126/000/001 126/000/002

Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Cuban Kit

Sound Effect

Kit

Keybaord/MIDI

SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note# Note

13 C# -1

14 D -1

15 D# -1

16 E -1

17 F -1

18 F# -1

19 G -1

20 G# -1

21 A -1

Conga H Tip 22 A# -1

Conga H Heel 23 B -1

Conga H Open

Drum Loop

24 C 0

Conga H Mute 25 C# 0

Conga H Slap Open 26 D 0

Conga H Slap 27 D# 0

Conga H Slap Mute 28 E 0

Conga L Tip 29 F 0

Conga L Heel 30 F# 0

Snare Jazz H Light Brush Slap L

Conga L Open 31 G 0

Conga L Mute 32 G# 0

Bass Drum L Conga L Slap Open 33 A 0

Conga L Slap 34 A# 0

Gran Cassa Conga L Slide 35 B 0

Bass Drum Jazz Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Bongo H Open 1 finger Heartbeat 36 C 1 Cutting Noise 1 Phone Call

Bongo H Open 3 finger Footsteps 37 C# 1 Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

Snare Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Snare M Bongo H Rim Door Squeak 38 D 1 Door Slam

Bongo H Tip Door Slam 39 D# 1 String Slap Scratch Cut

Snare Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Snare H Bongo H Heel Applause 40 E 1 Scratch

Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Bongo H Slap Camera 41 F 1 Wind Chime

Bongo L Open 1 finger Horn 42 F# 1 Telephone Ring 2

Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Bongo L Open 3 finger Hiccup 43 G 1

Bongo L Rim Cuckoo Clock 44 G# 1

Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Bongo L Tip Stream 45 A 1

Bongo L Heel Frog 46 A# 1

Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Bongo L Slap Rooster 47 B 1

Ja zz To m 5 Br u s h Tom 5 Jaz z To m 5 T imb ale L O p e n D o g 48 C 2

Hand Cymbal L Cat 49 C# 2

Ja zz To m 6 Br u s h Tom 6 Jaz z To m 6 O w l 50 D 2

Hand Cymbal Short L Horse Gallop 51 D# 2

Horse Neigh 52 E 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

Paila L Cow 53 F 2 Car Tires Squeal

Timbale H Open Lion 54 F# 2Car Passing

Scratch 55 G 2 Car Crash

Yo ! 5 6 G # 2Siren

Hand Cymbal H Go! 57 A 2 Train

Get up! 58 A# 2 Jet Plane

Hand Cymbal Short H Paila H Whoow! 59 B 2 Starship

Cowbell Top

Huuaah!

60 C 3 Burst

61 C# 3Roller Coaster

62 D 3 Submarine

63 D# 3

Guiro Short 64 E 3

Guiro Long 65 F 3

66 F# 3

67 G 3

Tambourine 68 G# 3 Shower Laugh

69 A 3 Thunder Scream

70 A# 3Wind Punch

71 B 3 Stream Heartbeat

Maracas

Uh!+Hit

72 C 4 Bubble Footsteps

Shaker 73 C# 4Feed

Cabasa 74 D 4

75 D# 4

76 E 4

77 F 4

78 F# 4

79 G 4

80 G# 4

81 A 4

82 A# 4

83 B 4

84 C 5 Dog Machine Gun

Applause 1 85 C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

Applause 2 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

Applause 3 87 D# 5Firework

Applause 4 88 E 5

89 F 5

90 F# 5

91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

D#5

Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi

PSR-A350

Voice No. 177 178 179 180 181

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 126/000/076 126/000/078 126/000/037 126/000/065 126/000/073

Keyboard MIDI

Arabic Kit 1 Arabic Kit 2 Arabic Kit 3 Arabic Mix Kit Khaligi Kit 1

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 Sagat1 Close Zarb Back mf Conga Analog H Khaligi Bongo Low Dom

26 D 0 14 D -1 Sagat2 Close Zarb Tom f Conga Analog M Khaligi Bongo Low Tak

27 D# 015D# -1 Sagat2 Open Zarb Eshareh Conga Analog L Khaligi Bongo Low Sak

28 E 0 16 E -1 Sagat3 Close Zarb Whipping Vibraslap Khaligi Bongo High Snap1

29 F 0 17 F -1 Sagat3 Open Tombak Tom f Kick Techno L Khaligi Bongo High Sak

30 F# 018F# -1 Mazhar Dom Open Neghareh Tom f Side Stick Arabic Mix Khaligi Bongo High Snap2

31 G 0 19 G -1 Mazhar Dom Close Tombak Back f Snare Techno Merjaf Group1 Dom

32 G# 020G# -1 Mazhar Tak Close Neghareh Back f Guiro Long Merjaf Group1 Sak

33 A 0 21 A -1 Mazhar Tak Open Tombak Snap f Kick Techno Q Merjaf Group2 Dom

34 A# 022A# -1 Mazhar Sak Close Neghareh Pelang f Open Rim Shot Merjaf Group2 Tak

35 B 0 23 B -1 Katem Dom1 Tombak Trill Funk Snare 2 Merjaf Group2 Sak

36 C 1 24 C 0 Katem Dom2 Bendir Large Dom Open1 Khaligi Clap 1 Kick Arabic Mix Doholla1 Dom

37 C# 125C# 0 Katem Tak Open1 Bendir Large Dom Open2 Arabic Zalgouta Open Funk Snare 1 Doholla1 Tak

38 D 1 26 D 0 Katem Tak Open2 Bendir Large Dom Close Khaligi Clap 2 Snare Arabic Mix Doholla1 Sak

39 D# 127D# 0 Katem Sak1 Bendir Large Sak1 Arabic Zalgouta Close Hand Clap Tabla1 Dom

40 E 1 28 E 0 Katem Sak2 Bendir Large Sak2 Arabic Hand Clap Snare Tabla1 Tak

41 F 1 29 F 0 Tabel Saaidi Dom Bendir Large Tak Open1 Tabel Tak 1 Tom Electro 1 Tabla1 Sak

42 F# 130F# 0 Tabel Saaidi Tak Bendir Large Tak Open2 Sagat 1 Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix Khaligi Conga Low Dom

43 G 1 31 G 0 Tabel Saaidi Rim Bendir Large Flam Tabel Dom Tom Electro 2 Tabla2 Dom

44 G# 132G# 0 Tabel Dom Bendir Large Flam Element1 Sagat 2 Hi-Hat Half Arabic Mix Tabla2 Tak

45 A 1 33 A 0 Tabel Tak Bendir Large Flam Element2 Tabel Tak 2 Tom Electro 3 Tabla2 Tik

46 A# 134A# 0 Tabel Tak Wood Bendir Large Flam Element3 Sagat 3 Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix Tabla2 Sak

47 B 1 35 B 0 Riq Dom Close Bendir Large Flam & Tak Riq Tik 3 Tom Electro 4 Khaligi Hand Clap1

48 C 2 36 C 1 Riq Dom Open Nakrazan Dom Riq Tik 2 Tom Electro 5 Marad Group1 Dom

49 C# 237C# 1 Riq Tak Close1 Nakrazan Flam Riq Tik Hard 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Marad Group1 Tak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Riq Tak Open Nakrazan Tak 1 Riq Tik 1 Tom Electro 6 Marad Group1 Sak

51 D# 239D# 1 Riq Tak Close2 Nakrazan Tak 2 Riq Tik Hard 2 Hi-Hat Open 3 Marad Group2 Dom

52 E 2 40 E 1 Riq Tak Snouj Nakrazan Tak 3 Riq Tik Hard 3 Reverse Cymbal Marad Group2 Tak

53 F 2 41 F 1 Riq Sak1 Nakrazan Gliss Down pppp Riq Tish Timbale L Marad Group2 Sak

54 F# 242F# 1 Riq Snouj Close1 Nakrazan Gliss Down ppp Riq Snouj 2 Conga H Open Marad1 Dom

55 G 2 43 G 1 Riq Snouj Close2 Nakrazan Gliss Down pp Riq Roll Timbale H Marad1 Tak

56 G# 244G# 1 Riq Flam Nakrazan Gliss Down p Riq Snouj 1 Conga H Mute Marad1 Sak

57 A 2 45 A 1 RIq Sak2 Nakrazan Noise FX Riq Sak Tambourine Marad2 Dom

58 A# 246A# 1 Riq Snouj Roll Nakrazan Roll1 Riq Snouj 3 Conga L Marad2 Tak

59 B 2 47 B 1 Darbuka Dom Left Hand Nakrazan Roll2 Riq Snouj 4 Cowbell Marad2 Sak

60 C 3 48 C 2 Darbuka Dom Right Hand Katem2 Dom1 Riq Tak 1 Claves Sajat1 Open

61 C# 349C# 2 Darbuka Tak Left Index Finger Katem2 Dom2 Riq Brass 1 Bongo H Sajat1 Close

62 D 3 50 D 2 Darbuka Tak Right Index Finger Katem2 Tak Open1 Riq Tak 2 Wood Block H Sajat2 Open

63 D# 35

1D# 2 Darbuka Sak1 Katem2 Tak Open2 Riq Brass 2 Bongo L Sajat2 Close

64 E 3 52 E 2 Darbuka Tak Left Ring Finger Katem2 Sak Riq Dom Wood Block L Sigal Marad Dom

65 F 3 53 F 2 Darbuka Tak Right Ring Finger Katem2 Sak Close1 Katem Tak Doff Kurdish Dohol Low f Sigal Marad Tak

66 F# 354F# 2 Darbuka Tap1 Katem2 Sak Close2 Katem Dom Cabasa Sigal Marad Sak

67 G 3 55 G 2 Darbuka Tap2 Katem2 Flam1 Katem Sak 1 Kurdish Dohol High f Taar Barashim Group1 Dom

68 G# 356G# 2 Darbuka Flam1 Katem2 Flam2 Katem Tak 1 Shaker Taar Barashim Group1 Sak

69 A 3 57 A 2 Darbuka Flam2 Katem2 Tak Close1 Katem Sak 2 Snap 1 Taar Barashim Group1 Tak

70 A# 358A# 2 Darbuka Tak Roll Katem2 Tak Close2 Katem Tak 2 Maracas Taar Barashim Group2 Sak

71 B 3 59 B 2 Daholla Dom Left Hand Katem2 Trem Dom Daholla Sak 2 Snap 2 Taar Barashim Group2 Dom

72 C 4 60 C 3 Daholla Dom Right Hand Katem Medium Dom Open1 Daholla Sak 1 Khaligi Twaisat 3 Taar Barashim Group2 Tak

73 C# 461C# 3 Daholla Tak1 Katem Medium Dom Open2 Daholla Tak 1 Khaligi Twaisat 1 Taar Barashim1 Dom

74 D 4 62 D 3 Daholla Tak2 Katem Medium Dom Close1 Daholla Dom Khaligi Twaisat 2 Taar Barashim1 Sak

75 D# 463D# 3 Daholla Tak3 Katem Medium Dom Close2 Daholla Tak 2 Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open Taar Barashim2 Dom

76 E 4 64 E 3 Daholla Tak4 Katem Medium Tak1 Tablah Prok Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open Taar Barashim2 Sak

77 F 4 65 F 3 Daholla Sak Katem Medium Tak2 Tablah Dom 2 Khaligi Tablah Small Dom Sigal Taar Barashim Dom

78 F# 466F# 3 Daholla Rak1 Katem Medium Sak1 Tablah Roll of Edge

Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom

Sigal Taar Barashim Tak

79 G 4 67 G 3 Daholla Rak2 Katem Medium Sak2 Tablah Tak Finger 4 Khaligi Tablah Small Snap Sigal Taar Barashim Sak

80 G# 468G# 3 Daholla Flam1 Katem Medium Flam Tablah Tak Trill 1

Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak

Taar Barashim Shake

81 A 4 69 A 3 Daholla Flam2 Katem Medium Flam Element1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Khaligi Tablah Small Sak Manjoor Normal

82 A# 470A# 3 Daholla Tak Roll Katem Medium Flam Element2 Tablah Tak Trill 2

Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak

Zeer1 Dom

83 B 4 71 B 3 Tabla Dom & Tak Katem Medium Flam&Tak Tablah Tak Finger 2 Khaligi Tablah Small Tik Zeer1 Flam

84 C 5 72 C 4 Tabla Dom Katem Small Dom Open Tablah Tak Finger 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Zeer2 Dom1

85 C# 573C# 4 Tabla Tak1 Katem Small Dom Close1 Tablah Tik 2 Khaligi Tar Segal Dom Zeer2 Flam

86 D 5 74 D 4 Tabla Tak2 Katem Small Dom Close2 Tablah Tik 4 Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Zeer2 Dom2

87 D# 575D# 4 Ta bl a Ta k 3 K a te m Sm all Tak 1 Ta bl ah Ti k 3 Kh ali gi Ta r Se ga l Tak Z e e r3 Tak1

88 E 5 76 E 4 Tabla Tak4 Katem Small Tak2 Tablah Tik 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 Zeer3 Dom1

89 F 5 77 F 4 Tabla Sak Katem Small Sak Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Dom 1 Zeer3 Dom2

90 F# 578F# 4 Tabla Rak1 Katem Small Flam Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 1 Zeer3 Tak2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Tabla Rak2 Katem Small Flam Element1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tremolo Tabol Low Dom

92 G# 580G# 4 Tabla Flam1 Katem Small Flam Element2 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Tak 2 Tabol Low Tak

93 A 5 81 A 4 Tabla Flam2 Katem Small Flam Element3 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tik 1 Tabol Low Sak

94 A# 582A# 4 Tabla Tak Roll Katem Small Flam & Tak Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tabol High Dom

95 B 5 83 B 4 Djembe Dom1 Katem Small Finger Tak Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Tik 3 Tabol High Tak

96 C 6 84 C 5 Djembe Dom2 Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tabol High Sak

97 C# 685C# 5Djembe Tak1 Req Dom

98 D 6 86 D 5 Djembe Tak2 Req Sajat

99 D# 687D# 5Djembe Flame Req Open

100 E 6 88 E 5 Djembe Flame & Tak Req Sak

101 F 6 89 F 5 Arabic Zalgouta Open Req Roll

102 F# 690F# 5 Arabic Zalgouta Close Khaligi Conga High Dom

103 G 6 91 G 5 Arabic Hand Clap Khaligi Conga High Sak

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi

PSR-A350

182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189

126/000/074 126/000/038 126/000/066 126/000/075 126/000/077 126/000/079 126/000/010 126/000/011

Khaligi Kit 2 Khaligi Kit 3 Khaligi Mix Kit Maghrebi Kit Iranian Kit 1 Iranian Kit 2 Turkish Kit 1 Turkish Kit 2

Sajat1 Open Khaligi Bongo L Dom Zalgouta Open Tunisian Tabel Dom1 Udho Tom Hole Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Tek 1

Sajat1 Close Khaligi Bongo L Tak Bell Tree Tunisian Tabel Dom2 Udho Tom Hole Stop Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Dum

Sajat2 Open Khaligi Bongo H Sak Zalgouta Close Tunisian Tabel Tak1 Udho Back1 Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Tek 2

Sajat2 Close Khaligi Bongo H Dom Timbale H Tunisian Tabel Tak2 Udho Back2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Kap

Sajat2 Hawan Tabel Lewa H Sak Timbale L Tunisian Tabel Tak3 Udho Chap Body Bendir Suat Tek 3 Bendir Suat Tek 3

Req Open Khaligi Bongo Snap Conga H Mute Tunisian Tabel Dom3 Udho Chap Skin Emn Bendir Tek1 Emn Bendir Tek 1

Req Sajat Tabel Lewa H Dom Bongo H Tunisian Tabla Dom Udho Chap Top Hole Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Dum

Req Dom Lewa Cymbal 2 Conga H Open Tunisian Tabla Tak1 Udho Flam Skin Emn Bendir Tek2 Emn Bendir Tek 2

Req Sak Tabel Lewa Bg Dom Bongo L Tunisian Tabla Tak2 Udho Flam Body Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Kapali

Req Roll Lewa Cymbal 1 Conga L Tunisian Tabla Sak Udho Roll Body Emn Bendir Tek3 Emn Bendir Tek 3

Manjoor Normal Tabel Lewa Bg Tak Shaker Tunisian Tabla Tak Mute Udho Roll Skin Emn Bendir Tek4 Emn Bendir Tek 4

Doholla2 Dom Tablah Big Dom 1 Tablah Dom 1 Tunisian Bendir1 Dom1 Tombak Tom

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum

Doholla2 Tak Tablah Big Tak 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tunisian Bendir1 Dom2 Tombak Chap1

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Roll Ayt Def Parmak Zil Roll

Doholla2 Sak Tablah Big Sak 1 Tablah Tik 3 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close1 Tombak Chap2

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2

Merwas Group Dom Tablah Big Dom 2 Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Open1 Tombak Back1

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3

Merwas Group Sak Tablah Big Tak 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Open2 Tombak Nail Swish Castanet Flam1

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4

Merwas Group Tak Tablah Big Sak 2 Tablah Tik 1 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Mute Tombak Edge Castanet Flam2 Mc Parmak Def Dum Mc Parmak Def Dum

Merwas Dom Tablah Smll Snp 2 Tablah Tremolo Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close2 Tombak Roll 8Fingers Castanet Left Normal Mc Parmak Def Roll Mc Parmak Def Roll

Merwas Sak Tablah Small Dom Cowbell Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close3 Tombak Flam1 Castanet Left Mute Mc Parmak Def Tek 1 Mc Parmak Def Tek 1

Merwas Tak Tablah Small Snap Hand Clap Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close4 Tombak Flam2 Castanet Left Normal L&R Mc Parmak Def Tek 2 Mc Parmak Def Tek 2

Khaligi Hand Clap2 Tablah Small Tik Tambourine Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Open3 Tombak Flam Rim Castanet Left Mute L&R Mc Parmak Def Tek 3 Mc Parmak Def Tek 3

Khaligi Hand Clap3 Tablah Small Sak Snare Tight Tunisian Bendir1 Roll Tombak Back2 Castanet Right Normal Mc Parmak Def Tek 4 Mc Parmak Def Tek 4

Khaligi Hand Clap4 Manjoor Kick Analog Short Tunisian Bendir2 Dom Roll Tombak Slap Castanet Right Mute Mc Parmak Def Kenar Udu Dum 1

Marad Group1 Dom Twaisat 1 Kick Tunisian Bendir2 Dom Open Daf Tom Goosha Naghareh Low Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Dum

Marad Group1 Tak Twaisat 4 Open Crash Cymbal 1 Tunisian Bendir2 Dom Close Daf Chain Up

Goosha Naghareh Low Rim

Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Roll

Marad Group1 Sak Twaisat 5 Open Snare Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Small Daf Back

Goosha Naghareh Low Flam

Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tokat

Marad Group2 Dom Twaisat 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open1 Daf Chain Down Goosha Naghareh High1 Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 1

Marad Group2 Tak Tar Low Dom 1 Side Stick Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open2 Daf Side No Chain Goosha Naghareh High2 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Ayt Open Def Tek 2

Marad Group2 Sak Tar Low Sak 1 Floor Tom L Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Mute Daf Roll

Goosha Naghareh High Rim

T Drbk Dum Udu Dum 2

Kaser Flam Tar Segal Dom Hi-Hat Closed Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Close1 Daf Roll Chain

Goosha Naghareh High Flam

T Drbk Roll Udu Bass Tek 2

Kaser Dom1 Tar Low Dom 2 Floor Tom H Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Close2 Daf Roll Rim Finger Cymbal Open Left T Drbk Tok Udu Bass Tek 3

Kaser Sak1 Tar Segal Tak Hi-Hat Pedal Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Close3 Daf Slap Open Finger Cymbal Mute Left T Drbk Tek 1 Udu Bass Tek 4

Kaser Dom2 Tar Low Dom 2 Low Tom Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open3 Daf Slap Mute Finger Cymbal Open Right T Drbk Tek 2 Udu Bass Tek 5

Kaser Sak2 Tar Segal Sak Hi-Hat Open Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open4 Naghareh Roll Finger Cymbal Mute Right T Drbk Tek 3 Udu High Tek 1

Taar Barashim Shake Arabic Hand Clap Mid Tom L Darbouka Finger Roll Naghareh Tom Finger Cymbal Mute L&R T Drbk Tek 4 Udu High Tek 2

Rana Low1 Dom Tar High Dom 1 Mid Tom H Darbouka Dom Naghareh Snap Iranian Bendir2 Tom Ayt Alm Tek 1

Mc Kemik Def Left Dum

Rana Low2 Dom Tar High Sak 1 Finger Snap 1 Darbouka Tak Close1 Naghareh Side Iranian Bendir2 Rim1 Ayt Alm Tek 2

Mc Kemik Def Left Tek1

Rana Low1 Tak Tar High Dom 2 Chinese Cymbal Darbouka Tak Close2 Naghareh Flam 3Fingers Iranian Bendir2 Rim2 Ayt Alm Tek 3

Mc Kemik Def Left Tek2

Rana Low2 Tak Tar High Sak 2 Finger Snap 2 Darbouka Tak Open1 Naghareh Back Iranian Bendir2 Back Ayt Alm Tek 4

Mc Kemik Def Left Tek3

Rana Low1 Sak Khaligi Clap 1 Riq Brass 2 Darbouka Tak Open2 Dohol Gorz Iranian Bendir2 Slap Ayt Alm Tek 5

Mc Kemik Def Left Tek4

Rana Low2 Sak Khaligi Clap 2 Riq Brass 1 Darbouka Tak Open3 Dohol Gorz & Tarkeh Iranian Bendir2 Rim Edge Suat Darbuka Dum Suat Darbuka Dum

Rana High1 Dom Merwas Solo 1 Dom Riq Tish Darbouka Tak Open4 Dohol Tarkeh1 Iranian Bendir2 Edge Mute Suat Darbuka Roll Suat Darbuka Roll

Rana High2 Dom Merwas Solo 2 Dom Riq Snouj 1 Darbouka Tak Close3 Dohol Tarkeh2 Iranian Bendir2 Flam Rim Suat Darbuka Tokat Suat Darbuka Tokat

Rana High1 Tak Merwas Solo 1 Sak Riq Roll Darbouka Tak Close4 Req Tom & Zang Iranian Bendir2 Flam Back Suat Darbuka Tek1 Suat Darbuka Tek 1

Rana High2 Tak Merwas Solo 2 Sak Riq Snouj 2 Darbouka Tak Open5 Req Chap Zang Open Iranian Bendir2 Flam Tom Suat Darbuka Tek2 Suat Darbuka Tek2

Rana High1 Sak Merwas Solo 1 Tak Riq Sak 1 Darbouka Tak Open6 Req Slap Iranian Bendir2 Rim Roll Suat Darbuka Tek3 Suat Darbuka Tek3

Rana High2 Sak Merwas Solo 2 Tak Riq Dom Darbouka Hand Roll Tombak Tempo Roll Iranian Bendir2 Roll Suat Darbuka Tek4 Udu High Tek 3

Medando1 Dom Tar Brshm Grp Dom Riq Snouj 3 Moroccan Bendir1 Dom Open Tombak Tempo Tom Tempo Edge Tom Cajon List Cajon List

Medando2 Dom Tar Brshm Grp Sak Tombak Back Moroccan Bendir1 Dom Close

Tombak Tempo Rim Flam

Tempo Rim 1 Tsm Mix List Tsm Mix List

Medando1 Sak Tar Brshm Grp Tak Tombak Tom Moroccan Bendir1 Tik Open Tombak Tempo Back 1 Tempo Tom 1 Art Bass Bendir Dum Hallo Stereo Dum

Medando2 Sak Tar Brshm Sl Sak Tombak Snap Moroccan Bendir1 Tik Close1 Tombak Tempo Back 2 Tempo Tom Slap Hallo Stereo Kapali Hallo Stereo Kapali

Medando Flam Tar Brshm Sl Dom Tombak Eshareh R Moroccan Bendir1 Tik Close2 Tombak Tempo Rim Tempo Rim 2 Art Bass Bendir Tek1 Udu High Tek 4

Mesando Dom Tar Brshm Sl Tak Claves Moroccan Bendir1 Zim

Tombak Tempo Rim Muted

Tem p o Tom 2

Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Mc Bass Darbuka Dum

Mesando Sak1 Yahla Dom 1 Daf Chap Moroccan Bendir2 Dom Open Tombak Tempo Slap Tempo Back

Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1

Mesando Sak2 Yahla Tak 1 Daf Tom Moroccan Bendir2 Dom Close Zarb Back Tempo Side 1

Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat

Schekanka Dom Yahla Dom 2 Daf Full Roll Moroccan Bendir2 Tik Close1 Zarb Flam Open Tempo Side 2

Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1

Schekanka Sak 1 Yahla Tak 2 Triangle Mute Moroccan Bendir2 Tik Close2 Zarb Rim Tempo Flam Rim

Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2

Schekanka Sak 2 Nagara High Daf Back Moroccan Bendir2 Tik Open Zarb Slap Tempo Flam Side

Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3

Tanak Dom 1 Nagara Low Triangle Open Moroccan Bendir2 Zim Zarb Roll Tempo Roll

Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4

Tanak Dom 2 Zeer Low Dom 1 Neghareh Tom Moroccan Bendir3 Dom Open Dayereh Tom Tempo Flam Tom Dansoz Zili 1 Udu High Tek 5

Khaligi Conga High Dom Zeer Low Roll Neghareh Back Moroccan Bendir3 Edge Open Dayereh Tom Muted Tempo Snap Rim Dansoz Zili 2 Ayt Alm Tek 1

Khaligi Conga High Sak1 Zeer Low Dom 2 Neghareh Roll Moroccan Bendir3 Tik Close Dayereh Rim 1 Tempo Snap Rim Mute Dansoz Zili 3 Ayt Alm Tek 2

Khaligi Conga High Sak2 Zeer High Roll Neghareh Snap Moroccan Bendir3 Tik Open Dayereh Rim Muted Tempo Mute Nail 1 Dansoz Zili 4 Ayt Alm Tek 3

Khaligi Conga Low Dom Zeer Low Dom 2 Wood Block H Moroccan Bendir3 Tik Stop Dayereh Rim 2 Tempo Mute Nail 2 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Ayt Darbuka Roll2

Khaligi Conga Low Sak Zeer High Dom 1 Wood Block L Moroccan Tamtam Low Dayereh Snap Tempo Mute Nail 3 Ayt Darbuka Dum Ayt Darbuka Dum

Ras Low Dom Tabel Low Dom Zarb Back Moroccan Tamtam Hi Dayereh Rim Edge Tempo Rim Roll Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Ayt Darbuka Roll1

Ras High Dom Zeer High Dom 2 Zarb Tom Moroccan Taarija1 Dom Dayereh Soft Roll Iranian Bongo Low Tom Ayt Darbuka Tok Ayt Darbuka Tok

Ras Low Sak Tabel Low Tak Zarb Eshareh Moroccan Taarija1 Tik Dayereh Tom Roll

Iranian Bongo High Back Left

Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Tek1

Sigal Marad Dom Tabel High Dom Zarb Whipping Moroccan Taarija2 Dom Dayereh Rim Roll

Iranian Bongo High Back Right

Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Tek2

Sigal Marad Tak Tabel High Sak Zarb Chap Moroccan Taarija2 Tik Dayereh Flam Tom

Iranian Bongo High Mute Right

Ayt Darbuka Tek3 Ayt Darbuka Tek3

Sigal Marad Sak Tabel High Tak Hi-Hat Closed Anlog Moroccan Taarija3 Dom Dayereh Flam Back Iranian Bongo Low Flam Ayt Darbuka Tek4 Ayt Darbuka Tek4

Kasoor Dom Tabel Low Sak Hi-Hat Open Anlog Algerian Bendir Deza Iranian Bendir1 Tom Iranian Bongo High Flam Ayt Darbuka Tek5 Ayt Darbuka Tek5

Kasoor Sak Riq Tish Tar Brshm Solo Sak Algerian Bendir Tak Droit Iranian Bendir1 Rim Iranian Bongo Low Roll Art Bass Bendir Tek2 Ayt Alm Tek 4

Kheshba Dom Tabel Mid Dom Tar High Sak 1 Algerian Bendir Tak Guche

Iranian Bendir1 Rim Edge

Iranian Bongo High Roll Ayt Darbuka Trak2 Mc Kemik Def List

Kheshba Sak Riq Snouj 1 Khishiba Dom 1 Algerian Bendir Kaf Iranian Bendir1 Slap Zangooleh Roll Ayt Alm Roll 2 Ayt Alm Roll 2

Jahla Group Dom Tabel High Dom Khishiba Dom 2 Algerian Galal Daza Iranian Bendir1 Back Zangooleh Shot Ayt Alm Dum2 Art Bass Bendir Tek1

Jahla Group Sak Tabel Low Dom Khishiba Sak 1 Algerian Galal Daza Gauche

Iranian Bendir1 Back Flam

Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Dum1

Jahla Dom Khishiba Dom 3 Algerian Galal Taka Droite Iranian Bendir1 Edge Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Roll 1

Jahla Sak Khishiba Sak 2 Algerian Galal Taka Gauche Iranian Bendir1 Roll Ayt Alm Tokat Ayt Alm Tokat

Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi

PSR-A350

Voice No. 190 191 192 193 194 195

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 126/000/012 126/000/013 126/000/014 126/000/015 126/000/017 126/000/019

Keyboard MIDI

Turkish Kit 3 Turkish Kit 4 2 Telli Kit Ankara Kit Azeri Kit Davul Mix Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Tek 1 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Tek2 Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Tek 1

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2

26 D 0 14 D -1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Dum Cirpak Darbuka 1 Tek3 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Dum

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3

27 D# 015D# -1 Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Tek 2 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Tek4 Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Tek 2

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4

28 E 0 16 E -1 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Kap Dansoz Zili 1 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Kap

29 F 0 17 F -1 Bendir Suat Tek 3 Bendir Suat Tek 3 Grup Davul Dum 1 Bendir Suat Tek 3 Bendir Suat Tek 3 Grup Davul Dum 1

30 F# 018F# -1 Dansoz Zili 1 Emn Bendir Tek1 Dansoz Zili 2 Emn Bendir Tek1 Emn Bendir Tek1 Grup Davul Dum Cr

31 G 0 19 G -1 Dansoz Zili 2 Emn Bendir Dum Grup Davul Dum 2 Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Dum Grup Davul Dum 2

32 G# 020G# -1 Dansoz Zili 3 Emn Bendir Tek 2 Grup Davul Tek 1 Emn Bendir Tek2 Emn Bendir Tek2 Grup Davul Tek 1

33 A 0 21 A -1 Dansoz Zili 4 Emn Bendir Kapali Grup Davul Tek 2 Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Kapali Grup Davul Tek 2

34 A# 022A# -1 Su a t Dr b k To k at E m n Be n di r Te k 3 Gr up Da v ul Te k 3 E mn B e nd i r Tek 3 E mn B e nd i r Tek 3 Gr u p Da vu l Te k 3

35 B 0 23 B -1 Ayt Alm Tek 1 Emn Bendir Tek 4 Grup Davul Tek 4 Emn Bendir Tek4 Emn Bendir Tek4 Grup Davul Tek 4

36 C 1 24 C 0 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum Ayt Open Def Dum

37 C# 125C# 0 Ayt Alm Tek 2 Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Def Parmak Zil Roll Ayt Open Def Roll

38 D 1 26 D 0 Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2 Ayt Open Def Tokat

39 D# 127D# 0 Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3 Ayt Open Def Tek 1

40 E 1 28 E 0 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4 Ayt Open Def Tek 2

41 F 1 29 F 0 T Drbk Dum Dansoz Zili 1 T Drbk Dum T Drbk Dum Mc Parmak Def Dum T Drbk Dum

42 F# 130F# 0 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Dansoz Zili 2 Dansoz Zili 3 T Drbk Roll Mc Parmak Def Roll T Drbk Roll

43 G 1 31 G 0 T Drbk Tok Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 T Drbk Tok Mc Parmak Def Tek 1 T Drbk Tok

44 G# 132G# 0 Ayt Alm Tek 4 Dansoz Zili 4 T Drbk Tek 1 T Drbk Tek 1 Mc Parmak Def Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 1

45 A 1 33 A 0 Tsm Mix Dum Suat Darbuka Dum T Drbk Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 2 Mc Parmak Def Tek 3 T Drbk Tek 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Tsm Mix Kapal? 2 Suat Darbuka Roll T Drbk Tek 3 T Drbk Tek 3 Mc Parmak Def Tek 4 T Drbk Tek 3

47 B 1 35 B 0 Tsm Mix Tek1 Suat Darbuka Tokat Stereo Bendir Dum T Drbk Tek 4 Mc Parmak Def Kenar T Drbk Tek 4

48 C 2 36 C 1 EQ Darbuka Tir 3 Suat Darbuka Tek 1 Stereo Bendir Kap EQ Darbuka Tir 3 Ayt Open Def Dum Dansoz Zili 1

49 C# 237C# 1 EQ Darbuka Tir 2 EQ Darbuka Tir 2 Stereo Bendir Tek1 EQ Darbuka Tir 2 Ayt Open Def Roll Dansoz Zili 2

50 D 2 38 D 1 Tsm Mix Tek 2 EQ Darbuka Tir 1 Stereo Bendir Tek2 Dansoz Zili 2 Ayt Open Def Tokat Dansoz Zili 3

51 D# 239D# 1 Tsm Mix Tek 3 EQ Darbuka Roll 2 EQ Darbuka Roll 2 Dansoz Zili 3 Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Dansoz Zili 4

52 E 2 40 E 1 Tsm Mix Tek 4 EQ Darbuka Dum 2 EQ Darbuka Dum2 Dansoz Zili 4 Ayt Open Def Tek 2

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum

53 F 2 41 F 1 EQ Darbuka Dum1 EQ Darbuka Dum 1 EQ Darbuka Dum1 Suat Darbuka Dum T Drbk Dum EQ Darbuka Dum1

54 F# 242F# 1 EQ Darbuka Roll 1 EQ Darbuka Roll 1 EQ Darbuka Roll 1 Suat Darbuka Tok T Drbk Roll

Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek1

55 G 2 43 G 1 EQ Darbuka Tokat EQ Darbuka Tokat EQ Darbuka Tokat Suat Darbuka Tek5 T Drbk Tok EQ Darbuka Tokat

56 G# 244G# 1 EQ Darbuka Tek01 EQ Darbuka Tek 01 EQ Darbuka Tek01 EQ Darbuka Tek 01 T Drbk Tek 1 EQ Darbuka Tek01

57 A 2 45 A 1 EQ Darbuka Tek02 EQ Darbuka Tek 02 EQ Darbuka Tek02 EQ Darbuka Tek 02 T Drbk Tek 2 EQ Darbuka Tek02

58 A# 246A# 1 EQ Darbuka Tek03 EQ Darbuka Tek 03 EQ Darbuka Tek03 EQ Darbuka Tek 03 T Drbk Tek 3 Stereo Bendir Dum

59 B 2 47 B 1 EQ Darbuka Tek04 EQ Darbuka Tek 04 EQ Darbuka Tek04 EQ Darbuka Tek 04 T Drbk Tek 4 Stereo Bendir Kap

60 C 3 48 C 2 EQ Darbuka Tek05 EQ Darbuka Tek 05 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 EQ Darbuka Tek 05 Mc Kemik Def Left Dum Stereo Bendir Tek1

61 C# 349C# 2 EQ Darbuka Tek06 EQ Darbuka Tek 06 EQ Darbuka Tek10 EQ Darbuka Tek 06 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek1 Stereo Bendir Tek2

62 D 3 50 D 2 EQ Darbuka Tek07 Suat Darbuka Tek 2 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Roll EQ Darbuka Tek 07 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek2 Hallo Stereo Dum

63 D# 351D# 2 EQ Darbuka Tek08 Suat Darbuka Tek 3 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Dum EQ Darbuka Tek 08 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek3 Hallo Stereo Kapali

64 E 3 52 E 2 EQ Darbuka Tek09 Suat Darbuka Tek 4 Vlk Davul Dum 2 EQ Darbuka Tek 09 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek4 Vlk Davul Dum 2

65 F 3 53 F 2 EQ Darbuka Tek10 EQ Darbuka Tek 10 Vlk Davul Dum 1 EQ Darbuka Tek 10 Davul Hand Dum Vlk Davul Dum 1

66 F# 354F# 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 Vlk Davul Roll1 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 Davul Hand Roll Vlk Davul Roll1

67 G 3 55 G 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 2 Vlk Davul Tek 1 EQ Darbuka Rak 2 Davul Hand Tek1 Vlk Davul Tek 1

68 G# 356G# 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 3 EQ Darbuka Rak 3 Vlk Davul Tek 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 3 Davul Hand Tek2 Vlk Davul Tek 2

69 A 3 57 A 2 EQ Darbuka Twin 1 EQ Darbuka Twin 1 Vlk Davul Tek 3 EQ Darbuka Twin 1 Davul Hand Tek3 Vlk Davul Tek 3

70 A# 358A# 2 EQ Darbuka Twin 2 EQ Darbuka Twin 2 Vlk Davul Tek 4 EQ Darbuka Twin 2 Davul Hand Tek4 Vlk Davul Tek 4

71 B 3 59 B 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 3 EQ Darbuka Tram 3 Vlk Davul Tek 5 EQ Darbuka Tram 3 Davul Hand Tek5 Vlk Davul Tek 5

72 C 4 60 C 3 EQ Darbuka Tram 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 2 Vlk Davul Tek 6 EQ Darbuka Tram 2 Davul Hand Tek6 Vlk Davul Tek 6

73 C# 461C# 3 EQ Darbuka Tram 1 EQ Darbuka Tram 1 Tsm Mix Dum EQ Darbuka Tram 1 Hallo Stereo Dum Sm Davul Roll

74 D 4 62 D 3 Hallo Stereo Dum Ayt Alm Tek 1 Sm Davul Dum Hallo Stereo Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Sm Davul Dum

75 D# 463D# 3 Hallo Stereo Kapali Ayt Alm Tek 2 Sm Davul Tek1 Hallo Stereo Kapali Art Doli Tir2 Sm Davul Tek1

76 E 4 64 E 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Roll2 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Sm Davul Tek2 Kasik Klik Art Doli Dum 2 Sm Davul Tek2

77 F 4 65 F 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Sm Davul Tek3 Kasik 1 Art Doli Dum 1 Sm Davul Tek3

78 F# 466F# 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Sm Davul Tek4 Kasik 2 Art Doli Tir1 Sm Davul Tek4

79 G 4 67 G 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Sm Davul Tek5 Kasik 3 Art Doli Tek 1 Sm Davul Tek5

80 G# 468G# 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Tsm Mix Tek1 Kasik 4 Art Doli Tek 2 Sm Davul Dum Cr

81 A 4 69 A 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 N Davul Dum3 Ayt Alm Tek 1 Art Doli Tek 3 N Davul Dum3

82 A# 470A# 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Ams Davul Dum 1 Ayt Alm Tek 2 Art Doli Tek 4 Ams Davul Dum 1

83 B 4 71 B 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Tsm Mix Tek2 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Art Doli Tek 5 Ams Davul Dum 2

84 C 5 72 C 4

Grup Davul THM mix List

Ayt Alm Tek 4 Ams Davul Tek 1 Ayt Alm Tek 4 Art Doli Tek 6 Ams Davul Tek 1

85 C# 573C# 4

Arbane Grup Art Bass List

Tsm Mix Dum Ams Davul Tek 2 Finger Left 6 Art Doli Tek 7 Ams Davul Tek 2

86 D 5 74 D 4 Ayt Darbuka Trak2 Tsm Mix Tek1 Ams Davul Tek 3 Finger Left 5 Art Doli Tek 8 Ams Davul Tek 3

87 D# 575D# 4 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Ams Davul Tek 4 Finger Left 4 Art Doli Tek 9 N Davul C Dum3

88 E 5 76 E 4 Ayt Darbuka Trak1 Tsm Mix Tek2 Tsm Mix Tek3 Finger Left 3 Ayak 1

Mc Kemik Def Right Dum

89 F 5 77 F 4 Ayt Darbuka Dum Ayt Darbuka Dum Cirpak Darbuka 2 Dum Finger Left 2 Ayak 2

Mc Kemik Def Right Tek1

90 F# 578F# 4 Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Cirpak Darbuka 2 Roll Finger Left 1 Ayak 3

Mc Kemik Def Right Tek2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Ayt Darbuka Tok Ayt Darbuka Tok Cirpak Darbuka 2 Tok Ayt Comlek Finger7 Ayak 4

Mc Kemik Def Right Tek3

92 G# 580G# 4 Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Cirpak Darbuka 2 Tek1 Ayt Comlek Finger6 Udu Dum 1

Mc Kemik Def Right Tek4

93 A 5 81 A 4 Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Tsm Mix Tek4 Ayt Comlek Finger5 Udu Bass Tek 5 N Davul Dum2

94 A# 582A# 4 Ayt Darbuka Tek3 Ayt Darbuka Tek3 N Davul Dum2 Ayt Comlek Finger4 Udu High Tek 1 N Davul Dum3

95 B 5 83 B 4 Ayt Darbuka Tek4 Ayt Darbuka Tek4 P Davul Dum Cr Ayt Comlek Finger3 Udu High Tek 2 N Davul Tek1

96 C 6 84 C 5 Darbuka Finger List Ayt Darbuka Tek5 P Davul Dum Ayt Comlek Finger2 Udu High Tek 3 N Davul Tek2

97 C# 685C# 5 EQ Darbuka Finger List EQ Darbuka Finger List P Davul Dum Tek1 Ayt Comlek Finger1 Udu High Tek 4 N Davul Tek3

98 D 6 86 D 5

Ayt Comlek Darbuka Finger

Tsm Mix Tek3 P Davul Dum Tek2 Udu High Tek 5 N Davul Tek4

99 D# 687D# 5 Ayt Alm Roll 2 Ayt Alm Roll 2 N Davul Dum3 Ayt Alm Roll 2 Udu High Tek 6 N Davul Tek5

100 E 6 88 E 5 Ayt Alm Dum2 Tsm Mix Tek4 N Davul Tek1 Ayt Alm Dum2 Tsm Mix Tek1 N Davul Tk1

101 F 6 89 F 5 Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Dum1 N Davul Tek3 Ayt Alm Dum1 Tsm Mix Tek2 N Davul Tk2

102 F# 690F# 5 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Roll 1 N Davul Tek4 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Tsm Mix Tek3 N Davul Tk3

103 G 6 91 G 5 Ayt Alm Tokat Ayt Alm Tokat N Davul Tk1 Ayt Alm Tokat Tsm Mix Tek4 N Davul Tk

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

PSR-A350

Song List / Song-Liste / Liste des morceaux / Şarkı Listesi

• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may

not be exactly the same as the original.

• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores

for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–5). To obtain the Song Book,

complete the user registration at the following website.

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

• Einige Songs wurden gekürzt oder vereinfacht und weichen

möglicherweise vom Original ab.

• Es ist ein Notenheft (Song Book; kostenlose herunterladbare Noten)

erhältlich, das die Noten aller integrierten Songs enthält (außer Songs

1–5). Um das Notenheft zu erhalten, füllen Sie das Anwender-

Registrierungsformular auf der folgenden Website aus.

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

• Certains morceaux ont été modifiés pour des raisons de longueur ou

pour en faciliter l'apprentissage et peuvent, de ce fait, être légèrement

différents des originaux.

• Un recueil de morceaux est disponible, comprenant les partitions

(téléchargeables gratuitement) de l'ensemble des morceaux internes (à

l'exception des morceaux 1 - 5). Pour obtenir le recueil de morceaux,

remplissez la fiche d'enregistrement utilisateur, accessible via le site

Web suivant.

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

• Şarkılardan bazıları uzunluk ya da kolay öğrenilmesi için düzenlenmiştir

ve orijinali ile tamamen aynı olmayabilir.

•Cihazın içindeki tüm şarkılar için partisyonları içeren bir şarkı kitabı

(ücretsiz indirilebilen partisyonlar) edinilebilir (1-5 arası şarkılar hariç).

Şarkı Kitabı'nı edinmek için aşağıdaki web sitesinde kullanıcı kaydını

tamamlayın.

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

Song No. Song Name

Demo

001 Arabic Demo (Yamaha Original)

002 Khaligi Demo (Yamaha Original)

003 Iranian Demo (Yamaha Original)

004 Turkish Demo (Yamaha Original)

005 Greek Demo (Yamaha Original)

Learn to Play

006 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)

007 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)

008 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)

009 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)

010 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)

011 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)

012 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)

013 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)

014 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)

015 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)

016 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)

017 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)

Favorite

018 Frère Jacques (Traditional)

019 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)

020 Aura Lee (Traditional)

021 London Bridge (Traditional)

022 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)

023 Nedelka (Traditional)

024 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)

025 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)

026 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)

027 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)

028 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)

029 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)

030 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)

031 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)

032 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

033 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)

034

Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48

(P. I. Tchaikovsky)

035 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)

036 Romance de Amor (Traditional)

Piano Repertoire

037 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)

038 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)

039 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)

040 Loch Lomond (Traditional)

041 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)

042 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)

043 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)

044 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)

045 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)

046 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)

047 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)

048 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)

049 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)

050 Annie Laurie (Traditional)

PSR-A350

Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Tarz Listesi

Style No. Style Name

ARABIC

1 Saeidy

2 ChaabiModern

3Mahragan

4 SaidiDance

5 KatakoftiLeb

6 WehdeLeb

7 LaffSyria

8 LaffMaksoum

9 BaladiLeb

10 Baladi

11 Katakou fti

12 Maksoum

13 Ayoub

14 WehdaSaghira

15 MaksoumSarih

16 Ibrahimi

17 Zaffah

18 Hajaa

19 6/8Soudasi

20 Wehda

21 SaeidyDance

22 Laff

23 Rumba

24 Fox

25 Valse

26 10/8Samai

KHALIGI

27 Haiwa

28 Georgina

29 RombaLive

30 BandariSeeroos

31 Dosari

32 Sowahli

33 KhebatiLive

34 Atbah

35 BandariEmirates

36 Khebaiti3/4

37 Khebaiti4/4

38 Yanbaawi

39 Samri

40 Bastah

41 Adaniat

42 Laiwa

43 Stati

44 Sout4/4

45 Muruba

46 Dazza

47 Tamburah

48 Sharh

49 Ashori

50 ShaabiEmirates

51 IraqiMix

MAGHREBI

52 BadouiWahrani

53 HadiBerwali

54 LibiChaabi

55 Aissawi

56 Zayani6/8

57 Chaabi

58 KaratchiMaroc

59 FazzaniTunisi

60 Ghita

61 Souga

62 Fazzani

IRANIAN

63 6/8Pop

64 6/8Looti

65 6/8Rengi

66 6/8Qeri

67 6/8Modern1

68 Bandari1

69 BandariModern

70 KordiPop

71 Bandari2

72 6/8Azari

73 AzariLezgi

74 6/8SlowAzari

75 2/4Azari

76 6/8Afqani

77 Raghs

78 6/8Dance

79 KoocheBazaari

80 IranianClub1

81 IranianClub2

82 3/4Irani

83 AstaAzari

84 6/8Modern2

85 6/8Tombak

TURKISH

86 Vahde

87 TurkishDance

88 2/4Oyun

89 Misket

90 3/4Slow

91 4/4Oriental

92 6/8Azeri

93 7/8Turku

94 7/8Karadeniz

95 2/4&6/8Halay

96 Ciftetelli

97 9/4Zeybek

98 6/8Halay

99 9/8Teke

100 9/8Tsm

101 TurkPop

102 9/8Trance

103 VahdeR&B

104 9/8Disco

105 Dansoz

GREEK

106 Zeibekikos

107 Tsifteteli

108 Kalamatianos

109 Syrtorumba

110 T s am i ko s

111 Ka rs il am as

112 H as ap iko

113 5 /8 Gree k

114 Hasaposerviko

Style No. Style Name

115 Kamilieriko

POP & ROCK

116 B ritPo pRo ck

117 8BeatModern

118 Cool8Beat

119 StadiumuRock

120 70sRock

121 HardRock

122 60sGuitarPop

123 8BeatAdria

124 60s8Beat

125 8Beat

126 OffBeat

127 Folkrock

128 60sRock

129 RockShuffle

130 8BeatRock

131 16Beat

132 PopShuffle

133 GuitarPop

134 16BeatUptempo

135 KoolShuffle

136 HipHopLight

BALLAD

137 70sGlamPiano

138 PianoBallad

139 LoveSong

140 6/8ModernEP

141 6/8SlowRock

142 OrganBallad

143 PopBallad

144 16BeatBallad

DANCE

145 ClubBeat

146 Electronica

147 FunkyHouse

148 RetroClub

149 USHipHop

150 MellowHipHop

151 Chillout

152 EuroTrance

153 Ibiza

154 SwingHouse

155 Clubdance

156 ClubLatin

157 Garage

158 TechnoParty

159 UKPop

160 HipHopGroove

161 HipShuffle

162 HipHopPop

163 ModernDisco

164 70sDisco

165 LatinDisco

166 SaturdayNight

167 DiscoHands

SWING&JAZZ

168 BigBandFast

169 BigBandBallad

170 AcousticJazz

Style No. Style Name

Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Tarz Listesi

PSR-A350

171 AcidJazz

172 JazzClub

173 Swing

174 Five/Four

LATIN

175 BrazilianSamba

176 BossaNova

177 Reggaeton

178 Mambo

179 Salsa

180 Beguine

181 Reggae

182 Tango

183 Pasodoble

184 Samba

185 ChaChaCha

186 Rumba

WORLD

187 GermanMarch

188 6/8March

189 PolkaPop

190 OberPolka

191 Tarantella

192 Showtune

193 AfricanGospelReggae

194 HighLife

WALTZ

195 VienneseWaltz

196 EnglishWaltz

197 SwingWaltz

198 JazzWaltz

199 OberkrainerWalzer

200 Musette

CHILDREN

201 Learning2/4

202 Learning4/4

203 Learning6/8

PIANIST

204 Stride

205 PianoSwing

206 Arpeggio

207 SlowRock

208 8BeatPianoBallad

209 6/8PianoMarch

210 PianoWaltz

Style No. Style Name

PSR-A350

Effect Type List / Effekttypenliste / Liste des types d'effets /

Efekt Türü Listesi

Harmony Types / Harmony-Typen / Types d'effets Harmony / Armoni Türleri

No. Harmony Type Description

001 Duet

If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while

playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three

notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that

includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.

Wenn Sie möchten, dass einer der Harmonietypen 01-05 erklingt, schlagen Sie bitte nach Aktivierung

der Begleitautomatik Tasten rechts vom Splitpunkt an, während Sie auf der linken Tastaturseite

Akkorde spielen. Der von Ihnen gespielten Note werden automatisch eine, zwei oder drei

Harmonienoten hinzugefügt. Bei der Wiedergabe von Songs mit Akkorddaten wird der Harmonieeffekt

angewendet, gleichgültig, welche Tasten angeschlagen werden.

Si vous voulez entendre un des types d'harmonie 01–05, jouez des notes à droite du point de partage

tout en jouant des accords dans la partie gauche du clavier après avoir activé l'accompagnement

automatique. Une, deux ou trois notes d'harmonie sont automatiquement ajoutées à la note que vous

jouez. Lors de la reproduction d'un morceau contenant des données d'accord, l'harmonie est

appliquée quelles que soient les notes jouées.

01–05 arasındaki armoni türlerinden birini seslendirmek istediğinizde, Otomatik Eşlik özelliğini

etkinleştirdikten sonra klavyenin sol tarafında akorları çalarken, Ayırma Noktası'nın sağ tarafındaki

tuşları çalın. Armoninin bir, iki veya üç notası, çaldığınız notaya otomatik olarak eklenir. Akor verilerini

içeren bir Şarkı yeniden çalınırken, basılan tuşlara uygun biçimde armoni eklenir.

002 Trio

003 Block

004 Country

005 Octave

006 Trill 1/4 note

If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously.

Wenn Sie zwei verschiedene Noten gedrückt halten, werden die Noten fortlaufend

abwechselnd gespielt (als Triller).

Si vous maintenez deux notes différentes enfoncées, les notes alternent en continu

(dans une trille).

İki farklı notayı basılı tuttuğunuzda, notalar (tril yapılarak) sürekli olarak yer değiştirir.

007 Trill 1/6 note

008 Trill 1/8 note

009 Trill 1/12 note

010 Trill 1/16 note

011 Trill 1/24 note

012 Trill 1/32 note

013 Tremolo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.

(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)

Wenn Sie eine einzelne Note gedrückt halten, wird die Note fortlaufend wiederholt.

(Die Wiederholungsgeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.)

Si vous maintenez une note unique enfoncée, celle-ci est répétée en continu.

(La vitesse de répétition varie en fonction du type sélectionné.)

Bir tek notayı basılı tuttuğunuzda, nota sürekli olarak tekrarlanır.

(Tekrarlanma hızı, seçilen türe bağlı olarak değişir.)

014 Tremolo 1/6 note

015 Tremolo 1/8 note

016 Tremolo 1/12 note

017 Tremolo 1/16 note

018 Tremolo 1/24 note

019 Tremolo 1/32 note

020 Echo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.

(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)

Wenn Sie eine Note gedrückt halten, wird auf die gespielte Note die Echofunktion

angewendet. (Die Echogeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.)

Si vous maintenez une note enfoncée, un écho est appliqué à la note jouée.

(La vitesse de l'écho varie en fonction du type sélectionné.)

Bir notayı basılı tuttuğunuzda, çalınan notaya eko özelliği eklenir.

(Eko hızı, seçilen türe bağlı olarak değişir.)

021 Echo 1/6 note

022 Echo 1/8 note

023 Echo 1/12 note

024 Echo 1/16 note

025 Echo 1/24 note

026 Echo 1/32 note

Effect Type List / Effekttypenliste / Liste des types d'effets / Efekt Türü Listesi

PSR-A350

Arpeggio Type List / Liste der Arpeggio-Typen / Liste des types d'arpege / Arpej Türü Listesi

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

027 UpOct

028 DownOct

029 UpDwnOct

030 SynArp1

031 SynArp2

032 SynArp3

033 SynArp4

034 SyncEcho

035 PulsLine

036 StepLine

037 Random

038 Down&Up

039 SuperArp

040 AcidLine

041 TekEcho

042 VelGruv

043 Planet

044 Trance1

045 Trance2

046 Trance3

047 ChordAlt

048 SynChrd1

049 SynChrd2

050 Syncopa

051 Hybrid1

052 Hybrid2

053 Hybrid3

054 Hybrid4

055 Hybrid5

056 PfArp1

057 PfArp2

058 PfArp3

059 PfArp4

060 PfClub1

061 PfClub2

062 PfBallad

063 PfChd8th

064 EPArp

065 PfShufle

066 PfRock

067 Clavi1

068 Clavi2

069 RocknPf

070 70RockPf

071 SlowflPf

072 SoulPf

073 ChordUp

074 ChdDance

075 LatinRck

076 Salsa1

077 Salsa2

078 Reggae1

079 Reggae2

080 Reggae3

081 6/8R&B

082 Gospel

083 BalladEP

084 Strum1

085 Strum2

086 Strum3

087 Strum4

088 Pickin1

089 Pickin2

090 Funky

091 GtrChrd1

092 GtrChrd2

093 GtrChrd3

094 GtrArp

095 FngrPck1

096 FngrPck2

097 CleanGtr

098 Slowfl

099 Samba1

100 Samba2

101 Spanish1

102 Spanish2

103 Harp1

104 Harp2

105 FngrBas1

106 FngrBas2

107 FngrBas3

108 CoolFunk

109 SlapBass

110 AcidBas1

111 Aci dB as 2

112 Fun ky Ba s

113 Cm bJazB 1

114 Cm bJazB 2

115 Cm bJazB 3

116 NewR&BBs

117 HipHopBs

118 SmoothBs

119 DreamBas

120 TranceBs

121 LatinBas

122 Strings1

123 Strings2

124 Strings3

125 Strings4

126 StrngDwn

127 StrngUp

128 OrcheStr

129 Jupiter

130 Pizz1

131 Pizz2

132 BrasSec1

133 BrasSec2

134 BrasSec3

135 FunkBras

136 SoulReed

137 DiscoLd

138 SmoothPd

139 PercArp

140 Ethnic

141 Cresendo

142 DiscoCP

143 Perc1

144 Perc2

145 R&B

146 Funk1

147 Funk2

148 Funk3

149 Soul

150 ClscHip

151 Smooth

152 NewGospl

153 CmbJazz1

154 CmbJazz2

155 Bebop

156 JazzHop

157 FolkRock

158 Unpluggd

159 HipHop

160 Trance

161 Dream

162 2 Step

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

163 ClubHs1

164 ClubHs2

165 EuroTek

166 House

167 Ibiza1

168 Ibiza2

169 Ibiza3

170 Garage

171 Samba

172 African

173 Latin

174 Arabic

175 Khaligi

176 Maghrebi

177 Iranian

178 Turkish

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

Effect Type List / Effekttypenliste / Liste des types d'effets / Efekt Türü Listesi

PSR-A350

Reverb Types / Reverb-Effekttypen / Types d'effets Reverb / Yankı Türleri

Chorus Types / Chorus-Effekttypen / Types d'effets Chorus / Koro Türleri

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3

Concert hall reverb.

Nachhall in einem Konzertsaal.

Réverbération d'une salle de concert.

Konser salonu yankısı.

04–05 Room 1–2

Small room reverb.

Nachhall in einem kleineren Raum.

Réverbération d'une petite salle.

Küçük oda yankısı.

06–07 Stage 1–2

Reverb for solo instruments.

Halleffekte für Soloinstrumente.

Réverbération pour instruments solo.

Solo enstrümanlar için yankı.

08–09 Plate 1–2

Simulated steel plate reverb.

Simulation des Halls in einer Stahlplatte.

Simulation de la réverbération d'une plaque d'acier.

Benzeşik çelik levha yankısı.

10 Off

No effect.

Kein Effekt.

Pas d'effet.

Efekt yok.

No. Chorus Type Description

1–3 Chorus 1–3

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

Herkömmlicher Chorus-Effekt mit vollem und warmem Klang.

Programme de choeur classique avec un effet de choeur riche et chaud.

Zengin ve sı cak koroya sahip klasik koro programı.

4–5 Flanger 1–2

This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.

Hiermit wird eine volltönende und lebhafte Tonhöhenschwankung erzeugt.

Vous obtenez un effet d'ondulation riche et animé dans le son.

Bu, sese zengin ve canlı bir titreme efekti katar.

6Off

No effect.

Kein Effekt.

Pas d'effet.

Efekt yok.

PSR-A350

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også

selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb

Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben

werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Ürünler hakkında ayrıntılar için, lütfen aşağıda listelenen size en yakın

Yamaha temsilcisine veya yetkili bayiye başvurun.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,

Canada

Tel: +1-416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: +1-714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José

Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,

D.F., C.P. 03900

Tel: +52-55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –

Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,

Brazil

Tel: +55-11-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: +54-11-4119-7000

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.

AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,

Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela

Tel: +58-212-943-1877

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,

P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: +44-1908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: +41-44-3878080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/

ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: +48-22-880-08-88

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: +359-2-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta

Tel: +356-2133-2093

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: +31-347-358040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: +33-1-6461-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: +39-02-93577-1

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,

Greece

Tel: +30-210-6686260

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46-31-89-34-00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Denmark,

Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland

Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark

Tel: +45-44-92-49-00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Antaksentie 4

FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland

Tel: +358 (0)96185111

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway

Tel: +47-6716-7800

ICELAND

Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.

Sidumula 20

IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: +354-525-5050

CROATIA

Euro Unit D.O.O.

Slakovec 73

40305 Nedelisce

Tel: +38540829400

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,

Moscow, 121059, Russia

Tel: +7-495-626-5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

Yama ha Music G u lf F ZE

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

TURKEY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz

Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

CYPRUS

Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.

Nikis Ave 2k

1086 Nicosia

Tel: + 357-22-511080

Major Music Center

21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy

P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus

Tel: (392) 227 9213

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yam aha Music G u lf F ZE

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: +86-400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: +852-2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Private Limited

Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,

Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,

Haryana, India

Tel: +91-124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: +62-21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,

Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea

Tel: +82-2-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: +60-3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: +65-6740-9200

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.

2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.

New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: +886-2-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: +66-2215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

http://asia.yamaha.com

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

VIC 3006, Australia

Tel: +61-3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: +64-9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

http://asia.yamaha.com

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI15

Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan

(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

ZT29180

Manual Development Department

Published 03/2016 PO##*.*-**A0

Printed in China

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Manual de instrucciones Kullanıcı el kitabı Türkçe Français Deutsch English DIGITAL KEYBOARD CLAVIER NUMÉRIQUE EN DE FR TR Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About the Manuals In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available. MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do. Computer-related Operations Contains instructions about computer-related functions. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-A350” (for example) to the Model Name box, then click [SEARCH]. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Song Book (only in English) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • AC adaptor*1 • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Using the Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. 2 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Contents About the Manuals................................................ 2 Included Accessories............................................ 2 Using the Music Rest............................................ 2 Formats and functions .......................................... 5 Setting Up Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up 8 10 Power Requirements .......................................... 10 Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment...................................................... 12 Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack.. 12 Turning the Power On/Off................................... 13 Setting the Volume ............................................. 13 Auto Power Off Function .................................... 13 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 14 Making the sound more spacious (Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 14 Display Items and Basic Operations 15 Display Items ...................................................... 15 Basic Operations ................................................ 15 Reference Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16 Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16 Resetting the Voice settings to Default (Playing the Oriental Voice) ........................... 16 Playing the Grand Piano Voice........................... 16 Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 17 Playing a Split Voice in the left-hand area.......... 17 Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend wheel ............................................................. 18 Setting the Touch Response on/off .................... 18 Adjusting the Voice parameters.......................... 19 Using the Metronome ......................................... 19 Applying effects to the sound ............................. 19 Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 20 Using Oriental Scales 22 Setting Oriental Scales ....................................... 22 Applying Scale Tuning to the Accompaniment Tuning............................................................ 23 Registering the Scale settings ............................ 23 Recalling the Scale settings ............................... 23 Playing Styles 24 Style Variations—Sections ................................. 25 Changing the Tempo .......................................... 26 Registering a Style file........................................ 26 Chord types for Style playback........................... 27 Looking up chords with the Chord Dictionary ..... 28 Playing Songs 29 Listening to a Demo Song................................... 29 Selecting and playing back a Song .....................29 Background music playback ...............................30 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ... 30 Changing the Melody Voice ................................30 A-B Repeat..........................................................31 Turning Each Part On/Off.................................... 31 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 32 Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) ........................ 32 Using the Song Lesson Feature 33 Downloading the Song Book...............................33 Keys To Success ................................................ 33 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................35 Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting ...........................................................36 Phrase Repeat ....................................................36 Recording Your Performance 37 Track Structure of a Song ................................... 37 Quick Recording..................................................37 Recording to a specified track.............................38 Clearing a User Song..........................................38 Playing the Keyboard with Two People (Duo Mode) 39 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 40 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory ..........................................................40 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ..........................................................40 Disabling recall of specific items (Freeze)...........41 The Functions 42 Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 46 Connecting to a computer ................................... 46 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.............................46 Backup and Initialization 46 Backup Parameters............................................. 46 Initialization ......................................................... 46 Appendix Troubleshooting............................................. 47 Specifications................................................. 48 Index................................................................ 49 Song Book Sample ........................................ 50 Voice List ........................................................ 60 Drum Kit List .................................................. 66 Song List......................................................... 71 Style List ......................................................... 72 Effect Type List .............................................. 74 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 3 Formats and functions GM System Level 1 USB “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GMcompatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). XGlite The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment knowhow into a single unified format. As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. Style File Format (SFF) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_01) The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) 4 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For PSR-A350 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 48) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. DMI-5 1/3 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 5 • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Battery • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - Use the specified battery type (page 48) only. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. DMI-5 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections Location 6 • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. 2/3 • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Handling caution Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others’ copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.  Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.  Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 46) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto an external device such as a computer (page 46). DMI-5  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 3/3 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 7 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Front Panel q w e r i t y o !0 u !1 !2 Song List (page 71) #1 !3 Style List (page 72) !4 !5 !6 Voice List (page 60) Display (page 15) #0 @9 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 @0 !7 @6 !8 @7 !9 @8 @1 8 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual @5 @2 @3 @4 C6 Panel Controls and Terminals q w e r t y [ ] (Standby/On) switch ..................... page 13 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ...................... page 13 [DEMO] button......................................page 30 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 42 [METRONOME] button......................... page 19 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 26 Rear Panel #2 In the Lesson mode u PART [L] button ..............................................page 35 [R] button ..............................................page 35 #3 #5 #4 #6 In the Recording mode u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 37 [REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 37 i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 33 o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 36 !0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button ...............................................................page 35 In the Song mode !1 [A-B REPEAT] button ...........................page 31 !2 [REW] button ........................................page 30 !3 [FF] button ............................................page 30 !4 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 30 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 [SUSTAIN] jack ..................................... page 12 [USB TO HOST] terminal*.................... page 46 [AUX IN] jack ........................................ page 32 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack ..................... page 12 DC IN jack ............................................. page 10 * For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 2) on the website. When connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. In the Style mode !1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .......................page 24 !2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.................page 25 !3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button....................page 25 !4 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 24 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1 [START/STOP] button .................. pages 24, 29 [REC] button .........................................page 37 [SONG] button ......................................page 29 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 16 [STYLE] button .....................................page 24 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] ........... page 15 [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO] button ............................................................... page 16 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button .......... page 14 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 32 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 40 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17 [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button..........page 20 [TOUCH] button.................................... page 18 [PITCH BEND] wheel ........................... page 18 [SCALE SETTING] buttons..................page 22 [SCALE MEMORY] buttons .................page 23 The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up  Notice for the AC adaptor Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. Using an AC adaptor 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlight display is off). Depending on your particular locale, the AC adaptor having a separable plug should be used. If the plug is accidentally removed from the AC adaptor, make sure to follow the explanations below for your safety. Reattaching the plug removed from the AC adaptor Without touching the metallic section, slide the plug into place as shown below then push it in completely until you hear the click sound. WARNING Plug • Use the specified adaptor (page 48) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. 2 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack (power Slide the plug as indicated supply jack). 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. * The shape of the plug differs depending on locale. CAUTION • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. • Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. DC IN jack (page 9) 2 AC adaptor 3 AC outlet NOTE • After turning off the power, follow this procedure in reverse order to disconnect the AC adaptor. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. 10 WARNING • Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Using Batteries This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/ Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickelmetal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance.  Installing the batteries 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off. 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. NOTE • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument.  Setting the battery type After installing new batteries and turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately (rechargeable or not) via Function number 061 (page 44). NOTICE • Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly. 3 Insert the six new batteries, putting them in the correct direction according to the illustration. 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. • Change the setting of the instrument according to the kind of battery you are using (Battery Type; page 44). When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-recharged ones. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack 1/4” stereo phone plug A pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the [PHONES/ OUTPUT] jack to a computer, a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn off the power for all components. NOTICE • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. NOTE • When connecting this instrument to an external speaker or headphone, we recommend that you select the “Headphon” (Headphones) type in Master EQ. For details, refer to “Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound” on page 14. 12 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a Footswitch (FC5/FC4A; sold separately) plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. • The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and style (automatic accompaniment; page 24). Setting Up Turning the Power On/Off Auto Power Off Function 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.” To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes. 2 Press the [  To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. To turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second. CAUTION • When using a AC adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Setting the Volume Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “AutoOff” (Function 060; page 44) appears, then use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes) Default value: 30 (minutes)  To disable the Auto Power Off function: Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power while holding down the lowest key. The Auto Power Off function also can be disabled by selecting Off in Function number 060 (page 44). When you start playing, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound. NOTE • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 46. CAUTION • Do not use this instrument at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Making the sound more spacious (Ultra-Wide Stereo) Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect. 1 Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button for longer than a second to call up “039 MasterEQ” (Function 039; page 43). 1 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to turn it on. 001 GrandPno “MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Master EQ type appears. Appears when UltraWide Stereo is on. MasterEQ The sound will expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside of the instrument. 039 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Speaker 1 039 Current Master EQ type 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 14 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button again to turn it off. To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type: Press the [FUNCTION] button several times to call up “Wide” (Function 040; page 43), then use the Number buttons. Display Items and Basic Operations Display Items Song/Voice/Style These indicate the operating condition of the instrument. Lesson Indication On/Off status This area indicates the Lesson related status is on. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. ... Touch Response (page 18) ... Ultra-Wide Stereo (page 14) ... Auto Accompaniment (page 24) ... Split (page 17) Keys To Success (page 33) Phrase Repeat (page 36) Notation Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function (page 28) is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. Chord Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto Accompaniment range (page 24) of the keyboard, or specified via Song playback. Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Indicates the Passing Status (page 34) of the Keys To Success lesson. ... Dual (page 17) ... Harmony (page 20) ... Arpeggio (page 20) ... Duo (page 39) 001 GrandPno 003 Measure or Function Normally indicates the current measure number of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION] button (page 42) is in use, this indicates the Function number. 003 027 Beat Indicates the current beat of playback. Song Track status Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or target Track of Song recording (page 31, 38). NOTE • Only notes occurring in the keyboard range are indicated. So, for some combinations of the selected Song and Main Voice, not all notes may be shown during the Song playback. Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Basic Operations Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values.  Number buttons  [-] and [+] buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Harpsichord. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3], or simply press [3]. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 15 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Reference In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of Voices that includes traditional oriental instruments, as well as guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects— giving you a wide variety of musical sounds. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. Voice number 001 Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired Voice. Refer to the Voice List on page 60. 096 230 Voice 230 “Oud” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. NOTE • If Voice 230 “Oud” has already been selected, pressing the button selects Voice 001 “Grand Piano.” In this case, press the button once more. Play the keyboard. Playing the Grand Piano Voice To quickly and easily call up a piano sound for simple piano playing, press the [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/ PIANO] button, repeatedly if necessary, until Voice 001 “Grand Piano” is shown in the display. 001 Preset Voice Types 16 Oud Flute Select 096 Flute 3 To reset various settings to their default values, press the [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO] button. GrandPno Appears after the [VOICE] button is pressed. 2 Resetting the Voice settings to Default (Playing the Oriental Voice) 001–176, 230–274 Instrument Voices (including sound effects). 177–209 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 66. 210–229 Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by simply playing the keyboard (page 20). 275–613 XGlite Voices (page 63) 000 One Touch Setting The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice when you select a Style or Song (excepting the Song inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual GrandPno This selects Voice 001 “Grand Piano” as the Main Voice. Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. 001 GrandPno Playing a Split Voice in the lefthand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and Right hand areas. Appears when Dual Voice is on 001 GrandPno Appears when Split Voice is on Two Voices will sound at the same time. 2 Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. 036 (C1) To select a different Dual Voice: Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual] button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 027; page 43), then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 048 (C2) Split Voice 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice and Dual Voice You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the Left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” (Function 007; page 42) which can be changed from the default F#2 key. 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. To select a different Split Voice: Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice” (Function 031; page 43), then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 17 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding pitch variations with the Pitch Bend wheel Setting the Touch Response on/ off The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. When you release the wheel it will automatically return to center position and the keyboard pitch will return to normal. 001 GrandPno Appears when Touch Response is on. NOTE • The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices (such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in the display. When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press the [TOUCH] button to turn the Touch Response off. Adjust the pitch bend range You can adjust the range of the pitch bend wheel in semitone increments. This can be set via Function number 006 (page 42). When the pitch bend range is set to “2,” for example, rolling the wheel all the way up will produce a maximum pitch rise of 2 semitones (one whole tone), and rolling it all the way down will produce a maximum pitch drop of the same amount (2 semitones or one whole tone). With the highest possible pitch bend range setting of “12,” the pitch bend range becomes +/-1 octave. 18 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys. Press the [TOUCH] button again to turn the Touch Response on. Changing the Touch Response Sensitivity When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard (how the sound responds to your playing strength). This can be set via Function number 008 (page 42). Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adjusting the Voice parameters The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or down in octaves) and Chorus Depth can be individually adjusted for the Main, Dual, and Split Voices. Voice Parameters (Volume, Octave, Chorus Depth) • Main Voice Parameters: Function numbers 024–026 • Dual Voice Parameters: Function numbers 028–030 • Split Voice Parameters: Function numbers 032–034 You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page 43). Using the Metronome The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. Applying effects to the sound You can apply the various effects to enhance the instrument’s sound. Reverb Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 035 (page 43). You can also set the Reverb Level via Function number 036 (page 43). Chorus Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 037 (page 43). Panel Sustain By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function number 038 (page 43), you can add a fixed, automatic sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can also be applied as desired with the footswitch (sold separately; page 12). NOTE • Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to which sustain is not applied. 2 Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. To change the tempo: Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 090 Tempo Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. To set the Time Signature: Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up “TimeSigN” (Function 051; page 44), then use the Number buttons to set the number of beats per measure. Also, the length of one beat can be set via “TimeSigD” (Function 052; page 44). To set the Metronome Volume: This can be set via Function number 053 (page 44). PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 19 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony or Arpeggio 2 You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Main Voice. By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply harmony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice or the Dual Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth— and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be used creatively in music production as well as performance. 1 Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio function. 001 After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the current type appears. Harm/Arp 043 Hold for longer than a second. 001 Duet 043 Current type 3 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired type. When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer to the Harmony Type list on page 74; to specify an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list on page 75. GrandPno NOTE • When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 178, select one of the following dedicated Voices as the Main Voice. 143–173: Select a Drum Kit from Voice Nos. 196–206. 174 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit 3” (Voice No. 179). 175 (Khaligi): Select “Khaligi Kit 1” (Voice No. 181). 176 (Maghrebi): Select “Arabic Mix Kit” (Voice No. 180). 177 (Iranian): Select “Iranian Kit 1” (Voice No. 186). 178 (Turkish): Select “Turkish Kit 4” (Voice No. 191). Appears when the Harmony is turned on. or 106 Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button for longer than a second so that “Harm/Arp” (Function 043; page 43) appears on the display. Analogon 4 Appears when the Arpeggio is turned on. Press a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio. When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the played sound of the Main Voice. Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on, the most suitable one will be selected for the current Main Voice. If you want to select a specific type, select it by the operation steps 2 and 3 below. NOTE • The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main Voice. • When selecting a Voice number between 210 and 229, the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on. • When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005, the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand melody play if you turn on the Style (page 24) and press chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. 5 20 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off, press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button again. Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices How the effect is applied to the sound for the various Types Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch (Hold) You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Harmony Type 001 to 005 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when Auto Accompaniment is on (page 24). 1 • Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill) Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 046; page 44) item appears on the display. After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the current setting is shown. Hold down two keys. Pdl Func • Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo) 046 Keep holding down the keys. 1 • Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo) Sustain 046 Play the keys. 2 • Arpeggio Type 027 to 178 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.” When Split is off: 2 Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice and the Dual Voice. 3 NOTE • Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/ Dual Voices simultaneously. Arp Hold 046 When Split is on: Arpeggio function applies only to the split Voice. Use the number buttons [1]–[3], [+], [-] buttons to select “Arp Hold.” Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio playback using the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. • Selecting a Voice number between 210 and 222 as the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split automatically. To adjust the Harmony Volume: This can be adjusted via Function number 044 (page 43). To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity: This can be adjusted via Function number 045 (page 43). PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 21 Using Oriental Scales The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily change the pitches of specific notes and create your own scales. Up to four scale settings can be stored for instant recall, allowing you to call up the settings at any time—even when you are playing. Setting Oriental Scales 00 Setting a Scale Tune D 012 The SCALE SETTING buttons let you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. These buttons simulate a one-octave keyboard (C through B). Current cent value The Scale Tuning function (one of the Functions 010–021; page 42) appears. 2 Adjust the Scale Tuning. Use the [+]/[-] or number buttons to adjust the desired tuning. The range is from “-64” to “63” cents. Press the button corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the indicator above the selected button is lit). Press again to return to normal pitch (0 cents). The setting affects all notes with the same note name over all octaves. NOTE Using the [+] and [-] buttons: Press the [+] or [-] button, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired pitch value appears in the display. To rapidly move through the values, press and hold the [+] or [-] button, until the desired pitch value appears in the display. • In musical terms, a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone (100 cents equal one semitone). • The Scale Setting function has no effect on some Voices such as the Drum Kit/SFX Kit Voices, and song playback. Adjusting the Scale Tuning of each note NOTE You can also adjust the scale tuning of each note in 1-cent increments as follows. 1 • To instantly reset the value to its default setting (0 cents), press the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. Negative values: You can also enter negative values directly, by simultaneously holding down the [-] button and using the number buttons. Hold down the desired “note” button (C– B) of the SCALE SETTING buttons for longer than a second. 3 Hold for longer than a second. 22 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Adjust other notes as desired. To do this, simply repeat steps 1–2 above. Using Oriental Scales Applying Scale Tuning to the Accompaniment Tuning You can select whether Scale Tuning is applied to accompaniment or not. This can be set via Function number 009: “TuneAcc” (page 42). oFF Recalling the Scale settings The scale settings stored to a SCALE MEMORY button can be recalled at any time simply by pressing the appropriate button. TuneAcc 009 Current setting Scale Memory can be turned off by pressing the currently lit SCALE MEMORY [1]–[4] button. The indicator goes out and the PSR-A350 returns to the regular scale setting. Registering the Scale settings The settings you make (using the SCALE SETTING buttons or via Function numbers 009–021; page 42) can be memorized to the SCALE MEMORY buttons for instant recall. 1 Make the desired scale settings (page 22). 2 While holding the SCALE MEMORY [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[4] buttons. The indicator of the selected button will flash during writing, then will light to indicate that the data has been stored. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. NOTE • The Scale Memory data is retained in memory even when the power is turned off. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in the Style List (page 72). 139 LoveSong Style Number Flashes when sync start is on. 139 LoveSong 4 Style Name Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. For information about chords, refer to “Chord Types for Style Playback” (page 27) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 28). This icon appears when the [STYLE] button is pressed. 2 Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start playback. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. Split Point 139 LoveSong This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 25. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) To play back the rhythm part only 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Auto Accompaniment range The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can be changed from the default of F#2 via Function number 007 (page 42). If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm part can be played back, and you can play a melody performance using the entire keyboard range. NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (204–210) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page. Adjusting the Style Volume To adjust the volume balance between Style playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume. This can be set via Function number 001 (page 42). 24 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Style Variations—Sections 7 Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. These instructions cover a typical example for using the Sections. After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. FILL A≥B 8 1–3 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Same as Steps 1–3 in page 24. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. MAIN A Current Section 5 ENDING The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. 6 Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 27. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Auto Accompaniment range PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles Changing the Tempo Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the Tempo value. 090 Tempo Registering a Style file Style data created on another instrument or a computer (“.sty” file transferred from a computer) can be registered to the Style numbers 211–220, and you can play them like the internal preset Styles. 1 Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Song. Using the Tap function Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a computer to this instrument by using Musicsoft Downloader. For instructions, refer to the online PDF manual (page 2) “Computer-related Operations.” 2 While a Song or Style is playing back, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat Song or Style. Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “StyleReg” (Function 023; page 43) appears. StyleReg 023 After about two seconds, the name of one of the transferred Style files name will appear in the display. If necessary, select the desired Style file by using the [+] or [-] button. 3 Press the [0] button. 4 Press the [0] button again. 5 Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 211– 220) appears on the display. If necessary, select the desired number using the [+] or [-] button. A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/ NO] button. NOTICE • The register operation cannot be canceled during execution. Never turn off the power during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 26 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Press the [STYLE] button, using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the registered Style (from 211–220), and then try playing it back. Playing Styles Chord types for Style playback For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Styles “G” is shown as the root note. Looking up chords with the Chord Dictionary Dict. The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 001 2-2. Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second. mM7 m7(9) 7(b13) 7aug (9) m(9) m7b5 7(9) dim7 7sus4 “Dict.” will appear in the display. Hold for longer than a second. M m6 m 7 m7 7(#9) 7(#11) aug 7(b9) 7(13) dim sus4 The notes you should play for the specified chord (Root note and Chord Type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. • The Root section: Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no sound. • The Chord Type section: Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no sound. • The Keyboard Play section: Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the above two ranges. Chord Type section M7 G Dict. Keyboard Play section Press the “M7” key in the Chord Type section. Chord name (Root and Type) Dict. 001 Notation of chord Root section Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(# 11), b 5, M7b 5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b 5, 7b 5, sus2 Far right of the keyboard 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. Press the “G” key in the Root section. C# D# Db Eb F# G# A# Gb Ab Bb C D E F G A B 28 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 3 Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the Keyboard Play section. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson.  Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. This is a collection of popular folk songs and classical pieces from around the world. Join in by playing the right-hand melody. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. Songs (User Songs) you record yourself. Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 2). Listening to a Demo Song Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo Songs in sequence. The Demo Songs (001–005) are played back in sequence. When the last Song (005) is finished, playback will start again from the first Song (001) and repeat continuously. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or press the [START/STOP] button. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. NOTE • External MIDI Songs containing the Portamento Control and Scale Tune settings may not be played correctly. To change the tempo: Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 26. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+]/[-] buttons after pressing the [DEMO] button. Adjusting the Song Volume To adjust the volume balance between Song playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume. This can be set via Function number 002 (page 42). Selecting and playing back a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the Number buttons to select the desired Song. Refer to the Song List (page 71). Song number 006 Elise 1 Song name Appears after the [Song] button is pressed. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Songs Background music playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only five internal Demo Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. 1 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause Like the transport controls on an audio player, this instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song. Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” (Function 057; page 44) is shown in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current repeat playback target. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. Use the [+] or [-] button to select a playback group. Demo Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. Preset songs (001–005) Preset All preset songs (001–050) User All User songs (051–055) Download All songs transferred from a computer (056–) NOTE NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO] button. • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. • To transfer Songs from a computer to this instrument, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 2). 3 Changing the Melody Voice Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or press the [START/STOP] button. Random Song Playback When the Demo Group (above) is set to something other than “Demo,” the playback order via the [DEMO] button can be changed between numerical order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Function 058; page 44) is called up, then select “Normal” or “Random.” 30 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other desired Voice. 1 2 3 Select a Song. Select the desired Voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the selected Voice replaces the Song’s original melody Voice. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. Playing Songs A-B Repeat Turning Each Part On/Off You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A B As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below), a Song consists of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individually by pressing the corresponding button, L or R. Repeat playback of this section 1 Start playback of the Song (page 29). 2 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A point. 018 FrereJac 010 Lit: Track contains data 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off during playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on the keyboard. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the Parts. NOTE • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song mode. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 31 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player, with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you play the keyboard along with playback of your music player. 1 Turn off the power for both the external audio device and this instrument. 2 Connect the audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at one side for connecting to this instrument and the plug matching the output jack of the external audio device at the other side. Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) When the sound of an external audio device is output through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of stereo playback. You can use the function to cancel the melody part then practice it via the keyboard. 1 Play back the connected external audio device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. Stereo-mini plug on Audio device (Portable audio player, etc.) MelodySP Appears when Melody Suppressor is on NOTE 3 Turn on the external audio device, then this instrument. 4 Play back the connected external audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 5 Adjust the volume balance between the external audio device and this instrument. • If an external audio device is not properly connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be turned on or shown in the display, even if you press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button. When the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled (or lowered) as expected 1 If possible, adjust the playback level of the external audio device first, to achieve optimum balance. NOTE Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “SupprPan” (Function 041; page 43) while the Melody Suppressor function is turned on. • You can adjust the level of the input from the external audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function number 003 (page 42) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons. 6 Play the keyboard along with the sound of the audio device. 7 After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. CAUTION (Left – Center – Right) L63 – C – R63 C Hold for longer than a second. 2 • Before connecting, turn off the power of both this instrument and the external audio device. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. SupprPan 026 Adjust the pan position of the sound to be canceled (lowered) by using the [+], [-] buttons. NOTE • Depending on the particular music content, the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. NOTICE • After connecting, first turn on the power to the external audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. 32 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. Using the Song Lesson Feature You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,” “Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R” or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If you have already passed several Steps, the next Step number appears on the display. Downloading the Song Book To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Appears when Keys to Success is on Keys To Success Step01 In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the entire Song. 1 Prepare the Song Book. Download the Song Book from the above website, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs at the end of this manual. The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are pre-programmed) will differ depending on the Song. For details, refer to the Song Book. Current Step number Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, playback of the current Step starts. NOTE • All preset Songs other than 001–005 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs. 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select a Song for your lesson. Step01 Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corresponding page of the Song Book. 001 NOTE 006 3 • For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may be slower than original. Elise 1 Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button to engage this lesson. 5 Practice the phrase in the current Step. Referring to the notation in the Song Book and the notes shown on the display, press the notes. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Song Lesson Feature 6 Confirm the evaluation in the current Step. When the current Step reaches the end, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 Confirming the Passing Status You can confirm the passing status of each Song simply by selecting a Song and each Step. When Step is selected Step01 Excellen 001 Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. ✩ : Passed No information: Not yet passed A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did not pass this Step and you should try the same Step again, which begins automatically. A score of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step, which begins automatically. When Song is selected 006 Elise 1 001 NOTE • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. 7 passed in addition to the last Step ✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on. In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all the way through the Song. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE • Even during lesson, you can select another Step by using the [+]/[-] buttons. 8 ✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. Clearing the Passing Status You can clear existing passing status entries for the entire Song or a specific Step of the Song. To clear the passing status entries of all Steps: Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds, with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. To clear the passing status entry for a specific Step: Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success, select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. NOTE • This operation cannot be executed during playback. 34 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Using the Song Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting 3 Lesson 1—Listening In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button to start playback of the Song Lesson. Pressing this button repeatedly will change the Lesson number from 1: LISTENING  2: TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this button until the desired number is shown on the display. Lesson 2—Timing In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes shown in the display will sound. NOTE • During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Lesson 3—Waiting In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. • The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting; page 16) during the Lesson. 4 NOTE • If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF via the Function number 056 (page 44). 1 When Lesson playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. “2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your performance in four levels. Excellent! ~~~~~~~~ Very Good! ~~~~~~ Good ~~~~ OK ~~ Press the [SONG] button then select a Song for your lesson. NOTE • The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 46), but cannot be applied to the User Songs. 2 After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Press either or both the [R] and [L] buttons to select the part you want to practice. Left-hand lesson NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the selected Voice. NOTE Right-hand lesson Left • The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during lessons. Right 5 Both-hands lesson Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. BothHand NOTE • In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the current Song does not contain a left-hand part. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 35 Using the Song Lesson Feature Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 33) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 35). 1 Enable the Keys to Success lesson. 2 Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-] buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select the desired lesson. Practicing only a single Phrase During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to practice. The corresponding Phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off the L or R part (page 31), then practice the phrase which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 33. The selected lesson playback starts under the Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the current Step via the selected Lesson. As evaluation for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is not available. 3 To return to only the Keys to Success mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select “off.” 4 To exit from the Lesson mode, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. P03 REPEAT Phrase number Even during repeat playback, you can select any other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you can return to normal playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again. Using Phrase Repeat with Listening, Timing or Waiting With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or three times to start and use Lesson playback with Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again several times to exit from the Lesson mode stops playback and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode. NOTE • In this status, the evaluation function is not available. Practicing two or more Phrases Phrase Repeat You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks pre-programmed in the Preset Songs. You can confirm the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 2). Phrase mark By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B (as the end point), you can practice two or more Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display, and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts. To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again. NOTE Repeat playback of this section 36 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual • You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons. • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Recording Your Performance You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 051–055). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. Track Structure of a Song User Song Number You can record your performance to the following two tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously. rEC User 1 001 Track 1: Your melody performance is recorded to this track. Flashes Track 2: Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord changes and Section changes), is recorded to this track. To exit from the Record mode (and stop the flashing indicators), press the [REC] button again. NOTICE • If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1” will automatically be selected. In this case, since you will record over and erase any previous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you save your important data as a Backup File to a computer (see page 46). Recording Data Capacity: NOTE • ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you can select another Style in this status by using the [STYLE] and Number buttons. A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. 3 Quick Recording The operation is convenient for recording a new Song without having to specify a track. 1 If ACMP is turned on, you can independently record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing the Section (page 25). Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Make the desired settings such as Voice and Style settings. 36 If you want to record only the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 24). If you want to record Style playback as well as melody performance, turn ACMP on (page 24). 2 Play the keyboard to start recording. Press the [REC] button to enable the Record mode. 48 60 72 Auto Accompaniment range 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then waiting until playback ends. On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons. NOTICE • After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal memory and result in a loss of data. 5 To play back the recorded Song, press the [START/STOP] button. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 37 Recording Your Performance Recording to a specified track 1 Make the desired settings, such as those of Voice or Style. If you want to record the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 24). If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 24). 2 Clearing a User Song 1 Press the [SONG] button then select the desired User Song by using the Number buttons. 2 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to engage the Record mode. A confirmation message appears. If you want to record Style playback, make sure to select the Track 2. If you want to record melody performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as desired. The illustration below is the example when selecting Track 2. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 3 3 YES User 1 001 If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for example and Track 1 contains already recorded data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will determine whether you listen to a previously recorded Track or not while recording a new Track. Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 37) in “Quick Recording.” Limitations while Recording • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons are not available, or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded: ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] button, [ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO] button. 38 A confirmation message appears again. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC 4 Press the [+/YES] button. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Sure? To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A “Writing!” message appears while the track is being cleared. Playing the Keyboard with Two People (Duo Mode) When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one person on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other person watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side. 1 To start this instrument in the Duo mode, simultaneously hold down the [L] button and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. How sounds are output in the Duo mode Notes played in the left Voice section sound from the left side speaker while notes played in the right Voice section sound from the right side speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This output setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut” setting (Function 042; page 43). “DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point and the keyboard is divided into two sections: one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice. NOTE • In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteristics of the stereo sound may differ from those in the normal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate” (page 43). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit features a different stereo pan position. Using sustain in the Duo mode on Equivalent to C3 Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by using one of the following methods in the Duo mode like the usual mode. DuoMode Split Point: 066 (F#3) Equivalent to C3 • Press the foot switch (page 12) connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Set “Sustain” (Function 038; page 43) to on. NOTE Left Voice • Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left Voice section and the right Voice section. Right Voice NOTE • While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is maintained even when the power is turned off. • The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice). • In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed from F# 3. 2 Style Playback in the Duo mode Although full Style features (accompaniment) cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part of a Style can be played back while playing the left/right Voices normally. One person should play the left Voice section of the keyboard while the other plays the right Voice section. Recording in the Duo mode Selecting a Voice Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in “Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16. NOTE • When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 142 to 168, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice. • Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode. The right Voice section and the left Voice section are recorded on the same track. 3 To exit from the Duo mode, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the power, and turn the power back on again normally. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 39 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Tempo, Main A/B Voice settings Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions Effect settings: Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/ off and all settings of the related Functions Other settings: Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch Response on/off, Panel Sustain on/off, Voice output * When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style settings can be recorded or called up. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button. “LoadNo.?” appears on the display. Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings such as those for Voice and Style. 2 Press and hold down the [REGIST MEMORY] button for longer than a second. LoadNo.? 2 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display. “MemNo.?” appears on the display. MemNo.? Hold for longer than a second. 3 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, an “Overwr?” message appears in the display. To overwrite, press the [+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO]. 40 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 01 REGIST 1 The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons. Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings Disabling recall of specific items (Freeze) Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you’ve made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. When you want to switch the Voice settings and the others but still maintain the Style settings, you can “freeze” only the Style settings and have those Style settings remain, even when you select another Registration Memory number. 1 Hold down the [TOUCH] button for longer than a second so that “Freeze” (Function 022; page 43) appears on the display. oFF Freeze 022 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to set the Freeze function on/off. When the Freeze function turned on, you can “freeze” or maintain Style settings, even when you select another Registration memory number. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 41 The Functions The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until the desired item appears. 2 Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. To decrease the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [-] button briefly. To increase the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [+] button briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button does not change the Function number. Current value Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off Function name Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On StyleVol 100 NOTE 001 • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE]. Function number After a few seconds, the Function name may be replaced with the setting value depending on the selected Function. NOTE • The Function number does not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat value appears instead. Function List Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. (page 24) 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 29) 003 AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 32) 004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 00 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. 005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 006 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Overall 007 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 008 Touch Response Sensitivity TouchRes 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard) Accompaniment Tuning TuneAcc ON/OFF Scale Tunings (Tune C – Tune B) Tune C : Tune B -64–00–63 440.0Hz 02 Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. Determines the pitch bend range. (page 18) 054 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 2 (Medium) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics. OFF Determines whether Scale Tuning is applied to the accompaniment or not.Use the [+] button to turn it on (apply it to the accompaniment) and [-] to turn it off. Scale Tune (page 22) 009 010–021 42 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 00 Determines the pitch of each note. (page 22) The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Registration Memory (page 41) 022 Registration Freeze Freeze ON/OFF OFF Determines whether or not the Style settings are maintained when you select another Registration memory number (page 41). Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 26). Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing along with a Song or a Style. Style file 023 Main Voice (page 16) 024 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * 025 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 026 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice (page 17) 027 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–613 * Selects a Dual Voice. 028 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 029 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 030 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice (page 17) 031 Split Voice S.Voice 001–613 * Selects a Split Voice. 032 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 033 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 034 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 035 Reverb Type Reverb 01–03 (Hall 1–3) 04–05 (Room 1–2) 06–07 (Stage 1–2) 08–09 (Plate 1–2) 10 (Off) ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 76) 036 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 1 (Chorus1) 2 (Chorus2) 3 (Chorus3) 4 (Flanger1) 5 (Flanger2) 6 (Off) ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 76) Effects 037 Chorus Type Chorus 038 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 039 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker) 2 (Headphone) 3 (Boost) 4 (Piano) 5 (Bright) 6 (Mild) 040 Wide Type Wide 1 (Wide1) 2 (Wide2) 3 (Wide3) 041 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 VoiceOut 1 (Normal) 2 (Separate) 042 Voice Output OFF 1 (Speaker) 2 (Wide2) C 1 (Normal) Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off. Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. (page 14) Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 14) Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio device to be canceled or lowered (page 32). When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 39) is on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the performance sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, and the performance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker. Harmony/Arpeggio (page 20) 043 Harmony/Arpeggio Type Harm/Arp 001–026 (Harmony) 027–178 (Arpeggio) * 044 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. ** If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume regardless of your playing strength. 045 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo 1 (Original) 2 (Thru) Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is selected. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 43 The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Pdl Func 1 (Sustain) 2 (Arp Hold) 3 (Hold+Sus) * PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 45). 048 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 049 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 050 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/ YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. 046 Pedal Function Refer to the page 21. Computer (page 45) 047 MIDI Metronome (page 19) 051 Time Signature Numerator 052 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note 053 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson (page 33) 054 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 055 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 056 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are playing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed you are playing at. Demo (page 29) 057 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 (Demo) 2 (Preset) 3 (User) 4 (Download) 1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group. 058 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 (Normal) 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode. 059 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (minutes) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery Auto Power Off (page 13) 060 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff Battery (page 11) 061 Battery Type Battery * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio. 44 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual The Functions PC Mode (FUNCTION 047) The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes * An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use. ** Cannot be set independently. NOTE • MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 45 Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad Connecting to a computer This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/ Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer connected via a USB cable. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the “Computerrelated Operations” (page 2) on the website. USB terminal Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 • Style: (.sty) • Backup File: PSR-A350.BUP * * Backup parameters (as described below) other than “Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. NOTE USB terminal • This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256 Song files. Connecting to an iPhone/iPad computer instrument USB cable NOTE • If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to register it to this instrument for Style playback. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on page 26. By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument, you can take advantage of various functions. To make connections, then refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” (page 2) on the website. Backup and Initialization Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Backup parameters • • • • • • • User Songs 1–5 (page 37) Style Numbers 211–220 (page 26) Scale Tune Memory (page 23) Registration Memory (page 40) Passing status of Song and Step (page 34) Touch Response on/off FUNCTION Settings: (page 42) Style Volume, Song Volume, Tuning, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch Response Sensitivity, Accompaniment Tuning, Scale Tunings, Registration Freeze, Panel Sustain, Master EQ Type, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Auto Power Off, Battery Type In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Initialization You can initialize your original data via the following two methods. 46 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data registered to Style numbers 211–220 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. NOTICE • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 2). Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with the application on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 44 Function 048.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 28), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06– 26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/ Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to STOP] button is pressed. “Function Settings” on page 44 (Function 049). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. • Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Stylerelated function. • The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on. The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 42 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 42 Function 007). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo- The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new The volume is too soft. ones, or use the included AC adaptor. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. • • • • Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 13). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (Function 060; page 44). When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 47 Specifications Size/Weight Control Interface Voices Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight Number of Keys Keyboard Touch Response Other Controllers Pitch Bend Wheel Type Display Backlight Language Tone Generation Technology Tone Generation Polyphony Preset Number of Voices Compatibility Types Effects Functions Preset Accompaniment Styles Songs (MIDI data only; audio not supported.) External Styles Other Features Compatibility Preset Recording Format Registration Memory Reverb Chorus Master EQ Ultra-Wide Stereo Harmony Arpeggio Dual Split Panel Sustain Melody Suppressor Number of Styles Fingering Style Control One Touch Setting (OTS) Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Playback Recording Number of Buttons Control Lesson/Guide Functions Overall Controls Miscellaneous Storage Storage and Connectivity Sound System Connectivity Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Duo Scale Setting Scale Memory PIANO Button Internal Memory DC IN Headphones/Output Sustain Pedal AUX IN USB TO HOST Amplifiers Speakers Power Supply Adaptor Batteries Power Supply Power Consumption Auto Power Off Included Accessories Separately Sold Accessories (May not be available depending on your area.) 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”) 4.6Kg (10lbs., 2oz.) (not including batteries) 61 On (Hard/Medium/Soft) / Off Yes LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) Yes English AWM Stereo Sampling 32 (max.) 221 Voices + 33 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices (including 45 Oriental Voices + 19 Oriental Percussion) GM, XGlite 9 types 5 types 6 types 3 types 26 types 152 types Yes Yes Yes Yes (for AUX IN) 210 (including 115 Oriental Styles) Multi Finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL Yes Yes Style File Format (SFF) 50 5 2 Approx. 10,000 notes SMF (Format 0, Format 1) Original File Format 9 Freeze [KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING], [PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY] Yes 11 – 280, Tap Tempo -12 – 0 – +12 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) Yes Yes Yes Yes (Oriental Instrument/Piano Button) Total maximum size approx. 1.26 MB 12 V Standard stereo phone jack (PHONES/OUTPUT) Yes Stereo mini jack Yes 2.5 W x 2 12 cm x 2 Users within Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 8W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor) Yes • Owner’s Manual • AC Adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • AC Adaptor: Users within Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Keyboard Stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/HPH-50 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • Wireless MIDI Adaptor: UD-BT01 * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 48 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual Index A Grand Piano .............................. 16 A-B Repeat ................................31 AC Adaptor ................................10 Accompaniment Tuning .......23, 42 ACMP ........................................24 Arpeggio ....................................20 Arpeggio Type ............... 20, 43, 75 Arpeggio Velocity ................21, 43 Auto Accompaniment ................24 AUTO FILL ................................25 Auto Power Off .................... 13, 44 AUX IN ........................................9 AUX IN Volume .........................42 H B Background music .....................30 Backup ......................................46 Backup Clear .............................46 Backup Parameters ...................46 Battery ....................................... 11 Battery Type ........................ 11, 44 Beat ...........................................15 C Chord ........................................15 Chord Dictionary .......................28 Chord Type ..........................27, 28 Chorus .......................................19 Chorus Type ........................ 43, 76 Computer ...................................46 Computer-related Operations ......2 D Demo .........................................29 Demo Cancel ............................44 Demo Group ..............................44 Demo Play Mode .......................44 Display ......................................15 Drum Kit List ..............................66 Dual Voice ........................... 17, 43 Duo ............................................39 E Effect ................................... 19, 43 Effect Type List .......................... 74 ENDING ....................................25 EQ Setting .................................14 External Clock ...........................44 Harmony ................................... 20 Harmony Type ..........20, 21, 43, 74 Harmony Volume ................ 21, 43 Headphones ............................. 12 I Initial Send ................................ 44 Initialization ............................... 46 INTRO ....................................... 25 iPad ........................................... 46 iPhone ....................................... 46 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual . 2 K Keyboard Display ...................... 15 Keys to Success ........................ 33 L Lesson ...................................... 15 Listening .............................. 33, 35 Local Control ............................. 44 M MAIN ......................................... 25 Main Voice .......................... 16, 43 Master EQ Type .................. 14, 43 Measure .................................... 15 Melody Suppressor ................... 32 Metronome ................................ 19 Metronome Volume ............. 19, 44 MIDI Basics ................................. 2 MIDI Reference ........................... 2 Music Rest .................................. 2 Musicsoft Downloader ............... 26 N Notation .................................... 15 O One Touch Setting .................... 16 ORIENTAL INSTRUMENT/PIANO . 16 Oriental Scales .......................... 22 P Registration Memory ................ 40 Reverb ...................................... 19 Reverb Level ............................. 43 Reverb Type .........................43, 76 rhythm ....................................... 24 rit. .............................................. 25 S SCALE MEMORY ..................... 23 SCALE SETTING ..................... 22 Scale Tuning ....................... 22, 42 Section ...................................... 25 Song ......................................... 29 Song Book ............................ 2, 33 Song Book Sample ................... 50 Song Category .......................... 29 Song List ................................... 71 Song Volume ...................... 29, 42 Specifications ........................... 48 Split ........................................... 17 Split Point .......................17, 24, 42 Split Voice ............................17, 43 Style ......................................... 24 Style File ............................... 4, 26 Style List ................................... 72 Style Register ........................... 43 Style Volume ....................... 24, 42 SUSTAIN .................................. 12 Sustain ...........................19, 39, 43 Synchro Start ............................ 24 T Tap ............................................ 26 Tempo ..................................19, 26 Time Signature ....................19, 44 Timing ................................. 33, 35 Touch Response ....................... 18 Touch Response Sensitivity .18, 42 Track ....................................15, 37 Transpose ................................. 42 Troubleshooting ........................ 47 Tuning ....................................... 42 U Ultra-Wide Stereo ..................... 14 USB ............................................ 4 USB TO HOST ........................... 9 User Song ................................. 37 Fast Forward .............................30 Fast Reverse .............................30 Flash Clear ................................46 Footswitch ........................... 12, 21 Freeze .................................41, 43 Function ............................... 15, 42 Function List ..............................42 Panel Sustain ...................... 19, 43 Part ........................................... 31 Passing Status .......................... 34 Pause ........................................ 30 PC Mode ............................. 44, 45 Pedal Function .......................... 44 Phrase Repeat .................... 33, 36 Pitch Bend Range ............... 18, 42 Pitch Bend wheel ...................... 18 Playback ............................. 29, 30 Power Requirements ................. 10 G R XGlite .......................................... 4 Random .................................... 30 Recording Data Capacity .......... 37 Y F GM System Level 1 .....................4 Grade ........................................35 V Voice ......................................... 16 Voice List .................................. 60 W Waiting ................................ 33, 35 Wide Type ................................. 43 X Your Tempo ............................... 44 PSR-A350 Owner’s Manual 49 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–5) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Diese Partitur ist im Notenheft enthalten (kostenlos herunterladbare Partituren). Neben den Partituren für die vorprogrammierten Songs (ausgenommen Songs 1–5) enthält das Notenheft auch Musikbegriffe und hilfreiche Hinweise für Ihre Übungen. Um das Notenheft zu erhalten, füllen Sie die Anwenderregistrierung auf der folgenden Webseite aus. Cette partition est fournie dans le recueil de morceaux (partitions téléchargeables gratuitement). Le recueil de morceaux contient non seulement les partitions de l'ensemble des morceaux internes (à l'exception des morceaux 1–5), mais également la terminologie musicale et les points essentiels pour vous exercer. Pour obtenir le recueil de morceaux, remplissez la fiche d’enregistrement utilisateur, accessible via le site Web suivant : Bu nota şarkı kitabı (ücretsiz indirilebilen notalar) ile birlikte verilir. Şarkı kitabı (Şarkı 1-5 hariç) tüm dahili şarkıların yanı sıra, müzik terimlerini ve pratik yapmanız için gereken en önemli noktaları da içerir. Song Book (Şarkı Kitabı) yayınını edinmek için aşağıdaki web sitesinde kullanıcı kaydını tamamlayın. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ * The Song book is provided only in English. * Das Notenheft ist nur auf Englisch vorhanden. * Song Book est disponible uniquement en anglais. * Şarkı kitabı yalnızca İngilizce dilinde sağlanır. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic SongNo.006 No.004 Song Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 50 PSR-A350 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys C D E 3 black keys F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note Whole note rest Dotted half note Dotted half note rest Half note Half note rest Dotted quarter note Dotted quarter note rest Quarter note Time signature Notes and Rests Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note Eighth note rest Sixteenth note Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-A350 51 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proﬁciency. From here... 52 PSR-A350 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 ...to here Für Elise Basic From here... ...to here PSR-A350 53 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three ﬁngers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.006 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll ﬁnd it easier to play if you bend your ﬁngers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 54 PSR-A350 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-A350 55 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your ﬁngers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it ﬁnishes playing the ﬁrst phrase. 56 PSR-A350 C Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your ﬁngers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand ﬁnger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-A350 57 Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The ﬁrst note has a staccato dot. Spread your ﬁngers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 58 PSR-A350 E C E Song Book Sample / Notenheft-Beispiel / Échantillon de recueil de morceaux / Song Book Örneği Song No.006 Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!” Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands. Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Left Right Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the ﬁrst half, if there are places you can’t play with conﬁdence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the ﬁnishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-A350 59 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Maximale Polyphonie Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von 32 Noten. Dies bedeutet, dass das Instrument unabhängig von den aktivierten Funktionen maximal 32 Noten gleichzeitig spielen kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten wird von der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Einsatz verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der Tastatur erfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Dasselbe gilt für die SongFunktionen. Wenn die maximale Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am frühesten gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority). HINWEIS • In der Liste der Voices sind für jede Voice MIDIProgrammwechsel- Nummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese Programmwechsel-Nummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern. • Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direct mit den MIDIProgrammwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127 zusammen. Das bedeutet: Programmnummern und Programmwechsel-Nummern unterscheiden sich mit einem Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überlegungen daran. • Solange der Sustain-Fußschalter gedrückt ist, ertönen einige Voices nach dem Loslassen der Taste eventuell kontinuierlich oder mit einer langen Abklingzeit (Decay). Polyphonie maximale Le PSR-A350 dispose d'une polyphonie maximale de 32 notes. Cela signifie que l'instrument peut reproduire un nombre maximal de 32 sonorités à la fois, indépendamment des fonctions utilisées. L'accompagnement automatique fait appel à un certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s'ensuit que lorsque l'accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de notes disponibles pour l'interprétation au clavier est réduit en conséquence. Cela s'applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice (Sonorités partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne produisent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier sont audibles (priorité à la dernière note). NOTE • La liste des sonorités comporte des numéros de changement de programme MIDI pour chaque sonorité. Utilisez ces derniers pour commander le PSR-A350 à partir d'un périphérique MIDI. • Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux numéros de changement de programme MIDI 000 à 127. Cela signifie que les numéros de programme et les numéros de changement de programme sont décalés de 1. N'oubliez pas de tenir compte de cet écart. • Certaines sonorités peuvent avoir une sonorité prolongée ou un long déclin après le relâchement des touches, et ceci pendant la durée de maintien de la pédale de sustain (sélecteur au pied). En Fazla Polifoni Sayısı Enstrümanda en fazla 32 notalık polifoni bulunur. Bu, hangi işlev kullanılırsa kullanılsın enstrümanın bir kerede en fazla 32 nota çalabileceği anlamına gelir. Otomatik eşlik, mevcut belirli bir sayıdaki notayı kullanır; böylece otomatik eşlik kullanıldığında, klavyedeki çalınabilir notaların toplam sayısı buna paralel olarak azaltılır. Aynısı Ses Ayırma ve Şarkı işlevleri için de geçerlidir. En fazla polifoni sayısı aşılırsa, daha önceden çalınmış notalar kesilir ve en son notalara öncelik verilir (son nota önceliği). 60 PSR-A350 NOT • Ses Listesi her bir ses için MIDI program değişim numaralarını içerir. Enstrümanı MIDI aracılığıyla harici bir cihazdan çalarken bu program değişim numaralarını kullanın. • 001 ila 128 arasındaki Program Numaraları doğrudan 000 ila 127 arasındaki MIDI Program Değişim Numaraları ile ilgilidir. Yani, Program Numaraları ve Program Değişim Numaraları arasındaki fark değeri 1'dir. Bunu dikkate almayı unutmayın. • Uzatma pedalı (ayak pedalı) basılı tutulurken, notalar bırakıldıktan sonra bazı sesler sürekli devam edebilir veya uzun süreli gecikme yaşanabilir. Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi Panel Voice List / Liste der Bedienfeld-Voices / Liste des sonorités de panneau / Panel Ses Listesi Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 121 40 Funk Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 Strings 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 115 50 Marcato Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin Voice No. 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Tenor Sax 1 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 2 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 116 62 Octave Brass 0 113 63 80s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 115 63 Funky Brass 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw 0 112 88 Under Heim 0 112 85 Portatone 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 121 82 Funky Lead 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven 0 121 89 Dream Heaven 0 113 89 Symbiont 0 112 99 Stardust 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums PSR-A350 61 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi Voice No. 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 62 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani WORLD 0 112 106 Banjo 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 105 Sitar 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 0 12 Shehnai 0 40 47 Yang Qin 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto DUAL* – – – Octave Piano – – – Piano & Strings – – – Piano Pad – – – Octave Harpsichord – – – Tiny Electric Piano – – – Electric Piano Pad – – – Full Organ – – – Octave Jazz Guitar – – – Octave Strings – – – Orchestra Section – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings – – – Strings Session – – – Brass Tutti – – – Orchestra Tutti – – – Octave French Horns – – – Octave Harp – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani – – – Octave Choir – – – Jazz Brass Section – – – Jazz Section – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble – – – Ballroom Brass – – – Flute & Clarinet – – – Trumpet & Trombone – – – Fat Synth Brass – – – Octave Lead – – – Super 5th Lead SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 126 0 76 Arabic Kit 1 126 0 78 Arabic Kit 2 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 3 126 0 65 Arabic Mix Kit 126 0 73 Khaligi Kit 1 126 0 74 Khaligi Kit 2 126 0 38 Khaligi Kit 3 126 0 66 Khaligi Mix Kit 126 0 75 Maghrebi Kit 126 0 77 Iranian Kit 1 126 0 79 Iranian Kit 2 126 0 10 Turkish Kit 1 126 0 11 Turkish Kit 2 126 0 12 Turkish Kit 3 126 0 13 Turkish Kit 4 126 0 14 2 Telli Kit PSR-A350 Voice No. 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 126 0 15 Ankara Kit 126 0 17 Azeri Kit 126 0 19 Davul Mix Kit 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 41 Cuban Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit ARPEGGIO** – – – Arabic Left – – – Khaligi Left – – – Maghrebi Left – – – Iranian Left – – – Turkish Left – – – Finger Bass Left – – – Combo Jazz Left – – – Paul's Bass Left – – – Trance Bass Left – – – Piano Ballad Left – – – Piano Arpeggio Left – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left – – – Strum Left – – – Concerto – – – Brass Section – – – Piano Ballad – – – Synth Sequence – – – Pickin' – – – Spanish – – – Funky Clavi ORIENTAL 0 113 106 Oud 0 115 106 Oud Tremolo 0 114 78 Nay 0 116 78 Nay Takasim 0 113 78 Kawala 0 113 108 Kanoun 0 116 108 Kanoun Tremolo 0 121 26 Saz 0 114 112 Surnay 0 123 26 Bouzouki 0 113 16 Santoor 0 115 41 Rababa 0 122 26 Bouzouk 0 116 106 Baglamas 0 117 106 Awtar 0 118 106 Awtar Tremolo 0 122 112 Sorna 0 114 106 Tar 0 114 16 Santuri 0 114 41 Kamanche 0 117 112 Gerba 0 121 112 Gerba Chorus 0 112 112 Dosaleh 0 115 112 Mijwez 0 116 112 Mizmar 0 119 112 Mizmar Oct. 0 120 112 Al Badou 0 118 112 Argoul 0 124 22 Accordion 0 125 49 Watariyat 1 0 127 49 Watariyat 2 0 114 46 Pizzicato Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi Voice No. 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 110 81 0 107 81 0 108 81 0 122 63 0 127 112 0 113 71 0 125 22 0 111 49 0 126 106 0 125 106 0 121 111 0 117 72 0 123 74 Voice Name Solo 1 Solo 2 Solo 3 Brass Zurna Balaban Garmon Yayli AkustikBaglama Ud Kemence Klarnet Kaval * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. **Selecting a Voice number between 210 and 229 will turn on Arpeggio. * Wenn Sie eine Voice der DUAL-Kategorie auswählen, erklingen zwei Voices gleichzeitig. **Wenn Sie eine Voice-Nummer zwischen 210 und 229 wählen, wird das Arpeggio eingeschaltet. * Lorsque vous sélectionnez une sonorité de la catégorie DUAL (Duo), deux sonorités retentissent en même temps. **La sélection d'un numéro de sonorité compris entre 210 et 229 entraîne l'activation de l'arpège. * DUAL kategorisinden bir Ses seçtiğinizde, iki ses aynı anda seslendirilir. **210 ile 229 arasında bir Ses numarası seçmek Arpej özelliğini otomatik olarak açar. XGlite Voice List / Liste der XGlite-Voices / Liste des sonorités XGlite / XGlite Ses Listesi Voice No. 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 1 0 64 11 Music Box 2 Voice No. 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ 0 0 20 Church Organ 1 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 1 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 PSR-A350 63 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi Voice No. 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 64 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 0 48 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 1 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact PSR-A350 Voice No. 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 1 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 1 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 1 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des sonorités / Enstrüman Sesi Listesi Voice No. 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 65 103 Big Pan 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 96 108 Taisho-kin XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum Voice No. 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework PSR-A350 65 Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “196: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). •“ ” bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeug-Sound dem des „Standard Kit 1“ entspricht. • Jede Percussion-Voice belegt eine Note. • MIDI-Note # und MIDI Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Oktave tiefer als hier aufgeführt. Im „196: Standard Kit 1“ beispielsweise entspricht „Seq Click H“ (Note# 36/Note C1) den Werten (Note# 24/Note C0). Voice Numbers 196–209: page 66 Voice Numbers 177–195: page 68 C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 66 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-A350 196 127/000/001 197 127/000/002 198 127/000/009 199 127/000/017 200 127/000/025 201 127/000/026 202 127/000/113 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Snare Rock H Snare H Soft 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 Snare Rock H Hi Q 2 Analog Snare Snappy Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog L Bass Drum Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Analog Bass Drum Dance 1 Abalog Snare Open Rim Analog Bass Drum Dance 2 Analog Bass Drum Dance 3 Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Q Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Snare + Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-Hat Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Claves Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Rock L Snare H Hard 2 Snare Room H Room Tom 1 Snare Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 Snare Rock H Electronic Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 4 Electronic Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6 Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi •« » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à celles de « Standard Kit 1 ». • Chaque sonorité de percussion utilise une note unique. • Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à une octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple, dans « 196 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1) correspond à (Note# 24/Note C0). 203 127/000/033 204 127/000/041 205 127/000/049 206 126/000/041 Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Cuban Kit Snare Jazz H Light Brush Slap L Bass Drum Jazz Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Snare Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Snare M Snare Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Marching Snare H Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Bass Drum L Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cymbal L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cymbal Short L Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Paila L Timbale H Open Hand Cymbal H Hand Cymbal Short H Paila H Cowbell Top • davul sesinin "Standard Kit 1" (Standard Set 1) ile aynı olduğunu gösterir. • Her perküsyon sesi bir nota kullanır. • MIDI Notası # ve Nota, aslında klavye Notası # ve Nota’dan bir oktav daha düşüktür. Örneğin, “196: Standard Kit 1", "Seq Click H" (Nota# 36/ Nota C1), (Nota# 24/Nota C0) değerine karşılık gelir. 209 126/000/113 Sound Effect Kit Drum Loop Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 Guiro Short Guiro Long E3 Huuaah! F3 D#3 F#3 G3 Tambourine G#3 A3 B3 Maracas Shaker Cabasa C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 Uh!+Hit F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 G5 D#5 F#5 Voice No. MSB / LSB / PC Keybaord/MIDI Note# Note 13 C# -1 14 D -1 15 D# -1 16 E -1 17 F -1 18 F# -1 19 G -1 20 G# -1 21 A -1 22 A# -1 23 B -1 24 C 0 25 C# 0 26 D 0 27 D# 0 28 E 0 29 F 0 30 F# 0 31 G 0 32 G# 0 33 A 0 34 A# 0 35 B 0 36 C 1 37 C# 1 38 D 1 39 D# 1 40 E 1 41 F 1 42 F# 1 43 G 1 44 G# 1 45 A 1 46 A# 1 47 B 1 48 C 2 49 C# 2 50 D 2 51 D# 2 52 E 2 53 F 2 54 F# 2 55 G 2 56 G# 2 57 A 2 58 A# 2 59 B 2 60 C 3 61 C# 3 62 D 3 63 D# 3 64 E 3 65 F 3 66 F# 3 67 G 3 68 G# 3 69 A 3 70 A# 3 71 B 3 72 C 4 73 C# 4 74 D 4 75 D# 4 76 E 4 77 F 4 78 F# 4 79 G 4 80 G# 4 81 A 4 82 A# 4 83 B 4 84 C 5 85 C# 5 86 D 5 87 D# 5 88 E 5 89 F 5 90 F# 5 91 G 5 207 126/000/001 208 126/000/002 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Maou PSR-A350 67 Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 A#5 C6 68 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 D# 2 63 D# 3 51 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-A350 177 126/000/076 178 126/000/078 179 126/000/037 180 126/000/065 181 126/000/073 Arabic Kit 1 Arabic Kit 2 Arabic Kit 3 Arabic Mix Kit Khaligi Kit 1 Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Vibraslap Kick Techno L Side Stick Arabic Mix Snare Techno Guiro Long Kick Techno Q Open Rim Shot Funk Snare 2 Kick Arabic Mix Funk Snare 1 Snare Arabic Mix Hand Clap Snare Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Half Arabic Mix Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Hi-Hat Open 3 Reverse Cymbal Timbale L Conga H Open Timbale H Conga H Mute Tambourine Conga L Cowbell Claves Bongo H Wood Block H Bongo L Wood Block L Kurdish Dohol Low f Cabasa Kurdish Dohol High f Shaker Snap 1 Maracas Snap 2 Khaligi Twaisat 3 Khaligi Twaisat 1 Khaligi Twaisat 2 Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open Khaligi Tablah Small Dom Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom Khaligi Tablah Small Snap Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak Khaligi Tablah Small Sak Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak Khaligi Tablah Small Tik Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Khaligi Tar Segal Dom Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Khaligi Tar Segal Tak Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 2 Khaligi Bongo Low Dom Khaligi Bongo Low Tak Khaligi Bongo Low Sak Khaligi Bongo High Snap1 Khaligi Bongo High Sak Khaligi Bongo High Snap2 Merjaf Group1 Dom Merjaf Group1 Sak Merjaf Group2 Dom Merjaf Group2 Tak Merjaf Group2 Sak Doholla1 Dom Doholla1 Tak Doholla1 Sak Tabla1 Dom Tabla1 Tak Tabla1 Sak Khaligi Conga Low Dom Tabla2 Dom Tabla2 Tak Tabla2 Tik Tabla2 Sak Khaligi Hand Clap1 Marad Group1 Dom Marad Group1 Tak Marad Group1 Sak Marad Group2 Dom Marad Group2 Tak Marad Group2 Sak Marad1 Dom Marad1 Tak Marad1 Sak Marad2 Dom Marad2 Tak Marad2 Sak Sajat1 Open Sajat1 Close Sajat2 Open Sajat2 Close Sigal Marad Dom Sigal Marad Tak Sigal Marad Sak Taar Barashim Group1 Dom Taar Barashim Group1 Sak Taar Barashim Group1 Tak Taar Barashim Group2 Sak Taar Barashim Group2 Dom Taar Barashim Group2 Tak Taar Barashim1 Dom Taar Barashim1 Sak Taar Barashim2 Dom Taar Barashim2 Sak Sigal Taar Barashim Dom Sigal Taar Barashim Tak Sigal Taar Barashim Sak Taar Barashim Shake Manjoor Normal Zeer1 Dom Zeer1 Flam Zeer2 Dom1 Zeer2 Flam Zeer2 Dom2 Zeer3 Tak1 Zeer3 Dom1 Zeer3 Dom2 Zeer3 Tak2 Tabol Low Dom Tabol Low Tak Tabol Low Sak Tabol High Dom Tabol High Tak Tabol High Sak Req Dom Req Sajat Req Open Req Sak Req Roll Khaligi Conga High Dom Khaligi Conga High Sak Sagat1 Close Sagat2 Close Sagat2 Open Sagat3 Close Sagat3 Open Mazhar Dom Open Mazhar Dom Close Mazhar Tak Close Mazhar Tak Open Mazhar Sak Close Katem Dom1 Katem Dom2 Katem Tak Open1 Katem Tak Open2 Katem Sak1 Katem Sak2 Tabel Saaidi Dom Tabel Saaidi Tak Tabel Saaidi Rim Tabel Dom Tabel Tak Tabel Tak Wood Riq Dom Close Riq Dom Open Riq Tak Close1 Riq Tak Open Riq Tak Close2 Riq Tak Snouj Riq Sak1 Riq Snouj Close1 Riq Snouj Close2 Riq Flam RIq Sak2 Riq Snouj Roll Darbuka Dom Left Hand Darbuka Dom Right Hand Darbuka Tak Left Index Finger Darbuka Tak Right Index Finger Darbuka Sak1 Darbuka Tak Left Ring Finger Darbuka Tak Right Ring Finger Darbuka Tap1 Darbuka Tap2 Darbuka Flam1 Darbuka Flam2 Darbuka Tak Roll Daholla Dom Left Hand Daholla Dom Right Hand Daholla Tak1 Daholla Tak2 Daholla Tak3 Daholla Tak4 Daholla Sak Daholla Rak1 Daholla Rak2 Daholla Flam1 Daholla Flam2 Daholla Tak Roll Tabla Dom & Tak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak1 Tabla Tak2 Tabla Tak3 Tabla Tak4 Tabla Sak Tabla Rak1 Tabla Rak2 Tabla Flam1 Tabla Flam2 Tabla Tak Roll Djembe Dom1 Djembe Dom2 Djembe Tak1 Djembe Tak2 Djembe Flame Djembe Flame & Tak Arabic Zalgouta Open Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Bendir Large Dom Open1 Bendir Large Dom Open2 Bendir Large Dom Close Bendir Large Sak1 Bendir Large Sak2 Bendir Large Tak Open1 Bendir Large Tak Open2 Bendir Large Flam Bendir Large Flam Element1 Bendir Large Flam Element2 Bendir Large Flam Element3 Bendir Large Flam & Tak Nakrazan Dom Nakrazan Flam Nakrazan Tak 1 Nakrazan Tak 2 Nakrazan Tak 3 Nakrazan Gliss Down pppp Nakrazan Gliss Down ppp Nakrazan Gliss Down pp Nakrazan Gliss Down p Nakrazan Noise FX Nakrazan Roll1 Nakrazan Roll2 Katem2 Dom1 Katem2 Dom2 Katem2 Tak Open1 Katem2 Tak Open2 Katem2 Sak Katem2 Sak Close1 Katem2 Sak Close2 Katem2 Flam1 Katem2 Flam2 Katem2 Tak Close1 Katem2 Tak Close2 Katem2 Trem Dom Katem Medium Dom Open1 Katem Medium Dom Open2 Katem Medium Dom Close1 Katem Medium Dom Close2 Katem Medium Tak1 Katem Medium Tak2 Katem Medium Sak1 Katem Medium Sak2 Katem Medium Flam Katem Medium Flam Element1 Katem Medium Flam Element2 Katem Medium Flam&Tak Katem Small Dom Open Katem Small Dom Close1 Katem Small Dom Close2 Katem Small Tak1 Katem Small Tak2 Katem Small Sak Katem Small Flam Katem Small Flam Element1 Katem Small Flam Element2 Katem Small Flam Element3 Katem Small Flam & Tak Katem Small Finger Tak Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi 182 126/000/074 183 126/000/038 184 126/000/066 185 126/000/075 186 126/000/077 187 126/000/079 188 126/000/010 189 126/000/011 Khaligi Kit 2 Khaligi Kit 3 Khaligi Mix Kit Maghrebi Kit Iranian Kit 1 Iranian Kit 2 Turkish Kit 1 Turkish Kit 2 Sajat1 Open Sajat1 Close Sajat2 Open Sajat2 Close Sajat2 Hawan Req Open Req Sajat Req Dom Req Sak Req Roll Manjoor Normal Doholla2 Dom Doholla2 Tak Doholla2 Sak Merwas Group Dom Merwas Group Sak Merwas Group Tak Merwas Dom Merwas Sak Merwas Tak Khaligi Hand Clap2 Khaligi Hand Clap3 Khaligi Hand Clap4 Marad Group1 Dom Marad Group1 Tak Marad Group1 Sak Marad Group2 Dom Marad Group2 Tak Marad Group2 Sak Kaser Flam Kaser Dom1 Kaser Sak1 Kaser Dom2 Kaser Sak2 Taar Barashim Shake Rana Low1 Dom Rana Low2 Dom Rana Low1 Tak Rana Low2 Tak Rana Low1 Sak Rana Low2 Sak Rana High1 Dom Rana High2 Dom Rana High1 Tak Rana High2 Tak Rana High1 Sak Rana High2 Sak Medando1 Dom Medando2 Dom Medando1 Sak Medando2 Sak Medando Flam Mesando Dom Mesando Sak1 Mesando Sak2 Schekanka Dom Schekanka Sak 1 Schekanka Sak 2 Tanak Dom 1 Tanak Dom 2 Khaligi Conga High Dom Khaligi Conga High Sak1 Khaligi Conga High Sak2 Khaligi Conga Low Dom Khaligi Conga Low Sak Ras Low Dom Ras High Dom Ras Low Sak Sigal Marad Dom Sigal Marad Tak Sigal Marad Sak Kasoor Dom Kasoor Sak Kheshba Dom Kheshba Sak Jahla Group Dom Jahla Group Sak Jahla Dom Jahla Sak Khaligi Bongo L Dom Khaligi Bongo L Tak Khaligi Bongo H Sak Khaligi Bongo H Dom Tabel Lewa H Sak Khaligi Bongo Snap Tabel Lewa H Dom Lewa Cymbal 2 Tabel Lewa Bg Dom Lewa Cymbal 1 Tabel Lewa Bg Tak Tablah Big Dom 1 Tablah Big Tak 1 Tablah Big Sak 1 Tablah Big Dom 2 Tablah Big Tak 2 Tablah Big Sak 2 Tablah Smll Snp 2 Tablah Small Dom Tablah Small Snap Tablah Small Tik Tablah Small Sak Manjoor Twaisat 1 Twaisat 4 Open Twaisat 5 Open Twaisat 2 Tar Low Dom 1 Tar Low Sak 1 Tar Segal Dom Tar Low Dom 2 Tar Segal Tak Tar Low Dom 2 Tar Segal Sak Arabic Hand Clap Tar High Dom 1 Tar High Sak 1 Tar High Dom 2 Tar High Sak 2 Khaligi Clap 1 Khaligi Clap 2 Merwas Solo 1 Dom Merwas Solo 2 Dom Merwas Solo 1 Sak Merwas Solo 2 Sak Merwas Solo 1 Tak Merwas Solo 2 Tak Tar Brshm Grp Dom Tar Brshm Grp Sak Tar Brshm Grp Tak Tar Brshm Sl Sak Tar Brshm Sl Dom Tar Brshm Sl Tak Yahla Dom 1 Yahla Tak 1 Yahla Dom 2 Yahla Tak 2 Nagara High Nagara Low Zeer Low Dom 1 Zeer Low Roll Zeer Low Dom 2 Zeer High Roll Zeer Low Dom 2 Zeer High Dom 1 Tabel Low Dom Zeer High Dom 2 Tabel Low Tak Tabel High Dom Tabel High Sak Tabel High Tak Tabel Low Sak Riq Tish Tabel Mid Dom Riq Snouj 1 Tabel High Dom Tabel Low Dom Zalgouta Open Bell Tree Zalgouta Close Timbale H Timbale L Conga H Mute Bongo H Conga H Open Bongo L Conga L Shaker Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tremolo Cowbell Hand Clap Tambourine Snare Tight Kick Analog Short Kick Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Crash Cymbal 2 Side Stick Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Finger Snap 1 Chinese Cymbal Finger Snap 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 1 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 2 Riq Sak 1 Riq Dom Riq Snouj 3 Tombak Back Tombak Tom Tombak Snap Tombak Eshareh R Claves Daf Chap Daf Tom Daf Full Roll Triangle Mute Daf Back Triangle Open Neghareh Tom Neghareh Back Neghareh Roll Neghareh Snap Wood Block H Wood Block L Zarb Back Zarb Tom Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Zarb Chap Hi-Hat Closed Anlog Hi-Hat Open Anlog Tar Brshm Solo Sak Tar High Sak 1 Khishiba Dom 1 Khishiba Dom 2 Khishiba Sak 1 Khishiba Dom 3 Khishiba Sak 2 Tunisian Tabel Dom1 Tunisian Tabel Dom2 Tunisian Tabel Tak1 Tunisian Tabel Tak2 Tunisian Tabel Tak3 Tunisian Tabel Dom3 Tunisian Tabla Dom Tunisian Tabla Tak1 Tunisian Tabla Tak2 Tunisian Tabla Sak Tunisian Tabla Tak Mute Tunisian Bendir1 Dom1 Tunisian Bendir1 Dom2 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close1 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Open1 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Open2 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Mute Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close2 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close3 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Close4 Tunisian Bendir1 Tak Open3 Tunisian Bendir1 Roll Tunisian Bendir2 Dom Roll Tunisian Bendir2 Dom Open Tunisian Bendir2 Dom Close Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Small Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open1 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open2 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Mute Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Close1 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Close2 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Close3 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open3 Tunisian Bendir2 Tak Open4 Darbouka Finger Roll Darbouka Dom Darbouka Tak Close1 Darbouka Tak Close2 Darbouka Tak Open1 Darbouka Tak Open2 Darbouka Tak Open3 Darbouka Tak Open4 Darbouka Tak Close3 Darbouka Tak Close4 Darbouka Tak Open5 Darbouka Tak Open6 Darbouka Hand Roll Moroccan Bendir1 Dom Open Moroccan Bendir1 Dom Close Moroccan Bendir1 Tik Open Moroccan Bendir1 Tik Close1 Moroccan Bendir1 Tik Close2 Moroccan Bendir1 Zim Moroccan Bendir2 Dom Open Moroccan Bendir2 Dom Close Moroccan Bendir2 Tik Close1 Moroccan Bendir2 Tik Close2 Moroccan Bendir2 Tik Open Moroccan Bendir2 Zim Moroccan Bendir3 Dom Open Moroccan Bendir3 Edge Open Moroccan Bendir3 Tik Close Moroccan Bendir3 Tik Open Moroccan Bendir3 Tik Stop Moroccan Tamtam Low Moroccan Tamtam Hi Moroccan Taarija1 Dom Moroccan Taarija1 Tik Moroccan Taarija2 Dom Moroccan Taarija2 Tik Moroccan Taarija3 Dom Algerian Bendir Deza Algerian Bendir Tak Droit Algerian Bendir Tak Guche Algerian Bendir Kaf Algerian Galal Daza Algerian Galal Daza Gauche Algerian Galal Taka Droite Algerian Galal Taka Gauche Udho Tom Hole Udho Tom Hole Stop Udho Back1 Udho Back2 Udho Chap Body Udho Chap Skin Udho Chap Top Hole Udho Flam Skin Udho Flam Body Udho Roll Body Udho Roll Skin Tombak Tom Tombak Chap1 Tombak Chap2 Tombak Back1 Tombak Nail Swish Tombak Edge Tombak Roll 8Fingers Tombak Flam1 Tombak Flam2 Tombak Flam Rim Tombak Back2 Tombak Slap Daf Tom Daf Chain Up Daf Back Daf Chain Down Daf Side No Chain Daf Roll Daf Roll Chain Daf Roll Rim Daf Slap Open Daf Slap Mute Naghareh Roll Naghareh Tom Naghareh Snap Naghareh Side Naghareh Flam 3Fingers Naghareh Back Dohol Gorz Dohol Gorz & Tarkeh Dohol Tarkeh1 Dohol Tarkeh2 Req Tom & Zang Req Chap Zang Open Req Slap Tombak Tempo Roll Tombak Tempo Tom Tombak Tempo Rim Flam Tombak Tempo Back 1 Tombak Tempo Back 2 Tombak Tempo Rim Tombak Tempo Rim Muted Tombak Tempo Slap Zarb Back Zarb Flam Open Zarb Rim Zarb Slap Zarb Roll Dayereh Tom Dayereh Tom Muted Dayereh Rim 1 Dayereh Rim Muted Dayereh Rim 2 Dayereh Snap Dayereh Rim Edge Dayereh Soft Roll Dayereh Tom Roll Dayereh Rim Roll Dayereh Flam Tom Dayereh Flam Back Iranian Bendir1 Tom Iranian Bendir1 Rim Iranian Bendir1 Rim Edge Iranian Bendir1 Slap Iranian Bendir1 Back Iranian Bendir1 Back Flam Iranian Bendir1 Edge Iranian Bendir1 Roll Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek1 Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Tek2 Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Tek3 Emn Bendir Tek4 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum Ayt Def Parmak Zil Roll Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4 Mc Parmak Def Dum Mc Parmak Def Roll Mc Parmak Def Tek 1 Mc Parmak Def Tek 2 Mc Parmak Def Tek 3 Mc Parmak Def Tek 4 Mc Parmak Def Kenar Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 T Drbk Dum T Drbk Roll T Drbk Tok T Drbk Tek 1 T Drbk Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 3 T Drbk Tek 4 Ayt Alm Tek 1 Ayt Alm Tek 2 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Ayt Alm Tek 4 Ayt Alm Tek 5 Suat Darbuka Dum Suat Darbuka Roll Suat Darbuka Tokat Suat Darbuka Tek1 Suat Darbuka Tek2 Suat Darbuka Tek3 Suat Darbuka Tek4 Cajon List Tsm Mix List Art Bass Bendir Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Art Bass Bendir Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Dansoz Zili 1 Dansoz Zili 2 Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Ayt Darbuka Dum Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Ayt Darbuka Tok Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Tek3 Ayt Darbuka Tek4 Ayt Darbuka Tek5 Art Bass Bendir Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Trak2 Ayt Alm Roll 2 Ayt Alm Dum2 Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Tokat Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek 1 Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Tek 2 Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek 4 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum Ayt Def Parmak Zil Roll Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4 Mc Parmak Def Dum Mc Parmak Def Roll Mc Parmak Def Tek 1 Mc Parmak Def Tek 2 Mc Parmak Def Tek 3 Mc Parmak Def Tek 4 Udu Dum 1 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Udu Dum 2 Udu Bass Tek 2 Udu Bass Tek 3 Udu Bass Tek 4 Udu Bass Tek 5 Udu High Tek 1 Udu High Tek 2 Mc Kemik Def Left Dum Mc Kemik Def Left Tek1 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek2 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek3 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek4 Suat Darbuka Dum Suat Darbuka Roll Suat Darbuka Tokat Suat Darbuka Tek1 Suat Darbuka Tek2 Suat Darbuka Tek3 Udu High Tek 3 Cajon List Tsm Mix List Hallo Stereo Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Udu High Tek 4 Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Udu High Tek 5 Ayt Alm Tek 1 Ayt Alm Tek 2 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Ayt Darbuka Dum Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Ayt Darbuka Tok Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Tek3 Ayt Darbuka Tek4 Ayt Darbuka Tek5 Ayt Alm Tek 4 Mc Kemik Def List Ayt Alm Roll 2 Art Bass Bendir Tek1 Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Tokat Castanet Flam1 Castanet Flam2 Castanet Left Normal Castanet Left Mute Castanet Left Normal L&R Castanet Left Mute L&R Castanet Right Normal Castanet Right Mute Goosha Naghareh Low Goosha Naghareh Low Rim Goosha Naghareh Low Flam Goosha Naghareh High1 Goosha Naghareh High2 Goosha Naghareh High Rim Goosha Naghareh High Flam Finger Cymbal Open Left Finger Cymbal Mute Left Finger Cymbal Open Right Finger Cymbal Mute Right Finger Cymbal Mute L&R Iranian Bendir2 Tom Iranian Bendir2 Rim1 Iranian Bendir2 Rim2 Iranian Bendir2 Back Iranian Bendir2 Slap Iranian Bendir2 Rim Edge Iranian Bendir2 Edge Mute Iranian Bendir2 Flam Rim Iranian Bendir2 Flam Back Iranian Bendir2 Flam Tom Iranian Bendir2 Rim Roll Iranian Bendir2 Roll Tempo Edge Tom Tempo Rim 1 Tempo Tom 1 Tempo Tom Slap Tempo Rim 2 Tempo Tom 2 Tempo Back Tempo Side 1 Tempo Side 2 Tempo Flam Rim Tempo Flam Side Tempo Roll Tempo Flam Tom Tempo Snap Rim Tempo Snap Rim Mute Tempo Mute Nail 1 Tempo Mute Nail 2 Tempo Mute Nail 3 Tempo Rim Roll Iranian Bongo Low Tom Iranian Bongo High Back Left Iranian Bongo High Back Right Iranian Bongo High Mute Right Iranian Bongo Low Flam Iranian Bongo High Flam Iranian Bongo Low Roll Iranian Bongo High Roll Zangooleh Roll Zangooleh Shot PSR-A350 69 Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de percussion / Davul Seti Listesi C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 A#5 C6 70 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-A350 190 126/000/012 191 126/000/013 192 126/000/014 193 126/000/015 194 126/000/017 195 126/000/019 Turkish Kit 3 Turkish Kit 4 2 Telli Kit Ankara Kit Azeri Kit Davul Mix Kit Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek1 Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Tek2 Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Tek3 Emn Bendir Tek4 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 T Drbk Dum T Drbk Roll T Drbk Tok T Drbk Tek 1 T Drbk Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 3 T Drbk Tek 4 EQ Darbuka Tir 3 EQ Darbuka Tir 2 Dansoz Zili 2 Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 Suat Darbuka Dum Suat Darbuka Tok Suat Darbuka Tek5 EQ Darbuka Tek 01 EQ Darbuka Tek 02 EQ Darbuka Tek 03 EQ Darbuka Tek 04 EQ Darbuka Tek 05 EQ Darbuka Tek 06 EQ Darbuka Tek 07 EQ Darbuka Tek 08 EQ Darbuka Tek 09 EQ Darbuka Tek 10 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 EQ Darbuka Rak 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 3 EQ Darbuka Twin 1 EQ Darbuka Twin 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 3 EQ Darbuka Tram 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 1 Hallo Stereo Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Kasik Klik Kasik 1 Kasik 2 Kasik 3 Kasik 4 Ayt Alm Tek 1 Ayt Alm Tek 2 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Ayt Alm Tek 4 Finger Left 6 Finger Left 5 Finger Left 4 Finger Left 3 Finger Left 2 Finger Left 1 Ayt Comlek Finger7 Ayt Comlek Finger6 Ayt Comlek Finger5 Ayt Comlek Finger4 Ayt Comlek Finger3 Ayt Comlek Finger2 Ayt Comlek Finger1 Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek1 Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Tek2 Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Tek3 Emn Bendir Tek4 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum Ayt Def Parmak Zil Roll Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4 Mc Parmak Def Dum Mc Parmak Def Roll Mc Parmak Def Tek 1 Mc Parmak Def Tek 2 Mc Parmak Def Tek 3 Mc Parmak Def Tek 4 Mc Parmak Def Kenar Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 T Drbk Dum T Drbk Roll T Drbk Tok T Drbk Tek 1 T Drbk Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 3 T Drbk Tek 4 Mc Kemik Def Left Dum Mc Kemik Def Left Tek1 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek2 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek3 Mc Kemik Def Left Tek4 Davul Hand Dum Davul Hand Roll Davul Hand Tek1 Davul Hand Tek2 Davul Hand Tek3 Davul Hand Tek4 Davul Hand Tek5 Davul Hand Tek6 Hallo Stereo Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Art Doli Tir2 Art Doli Dum 2 Art Doli Dum 1 Art Doli Tir1 Art Doli Tek 1 Art Doli Tek 2 Art Doli Tek 3 Art Doli Tek 4 Art Doli Tek 5 Art Doli Tek 6 Art Doli Tek 7 Art Doli Tek 8 Art Doli Tek 9 Ayak 1 Ayak 2 Ayak 3 Ayak 4 Udu Dum 1 Udu Bass Tek 5 Udu High Tek 1 Udu High Tek 2 Udu High Tek 3 Udu High Tek 4 Udu High Tek 5 Udu High Tek 6 Tsm Mix Tek1 Tsm Mix Tek2 Tsm Mix Tek3 Tsm Mix Tek4 Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Tek 3 Dansoz Zili 1 Dansoz Zili 2 Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 Suat Drbk Tokat Ayt Alm Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Alm Tek 2 Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 T Drbk Dum Ayt Alm Tek 3 T Drbk Tok Ayt Alm Tek 4 Tsm Mix Dum Tsm Mix Kapal? 2 Tsm Mix Tek1 EQ Darbuka Tir 3 EQ Darbuka Tir 2 Tsm Mix Tek 2 Tsm Mix Tek 3 Tsm Mix Tek 4 EQ Darbuka Dum1 EQ Darbuka Roll 1 EQ Darbuka Tokat EQ Darbuka Tek01 EQ Darbuka Tek02 EQ Darbuka Tek03 EQ Darbuka Tek04 EQ Darbuka Tek05 EQ Darbuka Tek06 EQ Darbuka Tek07 EQ Darbuka Tek08 EQ Darbuka Tek09 EQ Darbuka Tek10 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 EQ Darbuka Rak 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 3 EQ Darbuka Twin 1 EQ Darbuka Twin 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 3 EQ Darbuka Tram 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 1 Hallo Stereo Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Mc Bass Darbuka Roll2 Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Grup Davul THM mix List Arbane Grup Art Bass List Ayt Darbuka Trak2 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Ayt Darbuka Trak1 Ayt Darbuka Dum Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Ayt Darbuka Tok Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Tek3 Ayt Darbuka Tek4 Darbuka Finger List EQ Darbuka Finger List Ayt Comlek Darbuka Finger Ayt Alm Roll 2 Ayt Alm Dum2 Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Tokat Bendir Suat Tek 1 Bendir Suat Dum Bendir Suat Tek 2 Bendir Suat Kap Bendir Suat Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek1 Emn Bendir Dum Emn Bendir Tek 2 Emn Bendir Kapali Emn Bendir Tek 3 Emn Bendir Tek 4 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 Dansoz Zili 1 Dansoz Zili 2 Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 Suat Darbuka Dum Suat Darbuka Roll Suat Darbuka Tokat Suat Darbuka Tek 1 EQ Darbuka Tir 2 EQ Darbuka Tir 1 EQ Darbuka Roll 2 EQ Darbuka Dum 2 EQ Darbuka Dum 1 EQ Darbuka Roll 1 EQ Darbuka Tokat EQ Darbuka Tek 01 EQ Darbuka Tek 02 EQ Darbuka Tek 03 EQ Darbuka Tek 04 EQ Darbuka Tek 05 EQ Darbuka Tek 06 Suat Darbuka Tek 2 Suat Darbuka Tek 3 Suat Darbuka Tek 4 EQ Darbuka Tek 10 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 EQ Darbuka Rak 2 EQ Darbuka Rak 3 EQ Darbuka Twin 1 EQ Darbuka Twin 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 3 EQ Darbuka Tram 2 EQ Darbuka Tram 1 Ayt Alm Tek 1 Ayt Alm Tek 2 Ayt Alm Tek 3 Mc Bass Darbuka Dum Mc Bass Darbuka Roll1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tokat Mc Bass Darbuka Tek1 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek2 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek3 Mc Bass Darbuka Tek4 Ayt Alm Tek 4 Tsm Mix Dum Tsm Mix Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Roll2 Tsm Mix Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Dum Ayt Darbuka Roll1 Ayt Darbuka Tok Ayt Darbuka Tek1 Ayt Darbuka Tek2 Ayt Darbuka Tek3 Ayt Darbuka Tek4 Ayt Darbuka Tek5 EQ Darbuka Finger List Tsm Mix Tek3 Ayt Alm Roll 2 Tsm Mix Tek4 Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Tokat Cirpak Darbuka 1 Tek2 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Tek3 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Tek4 Dansoz Zili 1 Grup Davul Dum 1 Dansoz Zili 2 Grup Davul Dum 2 Grup Davul Tek 1 Grup Davul Tek 2 Grup Davul Tek 3 Grup Davul Tek 4 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 T Drbk Dum Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 T Drbk Tek 1 T Drbk Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 3 Stereo Bendir Dum Stereo Bendir Kap Stereo Bendir Tek1 Stereo Bendir Tek2 EQ Darbuka Roll 2 EQ Darbuka Dum2 EQ Darbuka Dum1 EQ Darbuka Roll 1 EQ Darbuka Tokat EQ Darbuka Tek01 EQ Darbuka Tek02 EQ Darbuka Tek03 EQ Darbuka Tek04 EQ Darbuka Rak 1 EQ Darbuka Tek10 Cirpak Darbuka 1 Roll Cirpak Darbuka 1 Dum Vlk Davul Dum 2 Vlk Davul Dum 1 Vlk Davul Roll1 Vlk Davul Tek 1 Vlk Davul Tek 2 Vlk Davul Tek 3 Vlk Davul Tek 4 Vlk Davul Tek 5 Vlk Davul Tek 6 Tsm Mix Dum Sm Davul Dum Sm Davul Tek1 Sm Davul Tek2 Sm Davul Tek3 Sm Davul Tek4 Sm Davul Tek5 Tsm Mix Tek1 N Davul Dum3 Ams Davul Dum 1 Tsm Mix Tek2 Ams Davul Tek 1 Ams Davul Tek 2 Ams Davul Tek 3 Ams Davul Tek 4 Tsm Mix Tek3 Cirpak Darbuka 2 Dum Cirpak Darbuka 2 Roll Cirpak Darbuka 2 Tok Cirpak Darbuka 2 Tek1 Tsm Mix Tek4 N Davul Dum2 P Davul Dum Cr P Davul Dum P Davul Dum Tek1 P Davul Dum Tek2 N Davul Dum3 N Davul Tek1 N Davul Tek3 N Davul Tek4 N Davul Tk1 Ayt Alm Roll 2 Ayt Alm Dum2 Ayt Alm Dum1 Ayt Alm Roll 1 Ayt Alm Tokat Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek2 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek3 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek4 Grup Davul Dum 1 Grup Davul Dum Cr Grup Davul Dum 2 Grup Davul Tek 1 Grup Davul Tek 2 Grup Davul Tek 3 Grup Davul Tek 4 Ayt Open Def Dum Ayt Open Def Roll Ayt Open Def Tokat Ayt Open Def Tek 1 Ayt Open Def Tek 2 T Drbk Dum T Drbk Roll T Drbk Tok T Drbk Tek 1 T Drbk Tek 2 T Drbk Tek 3 T Drbk Tek 4 Dansoz Zili 1 Dansoz Zili 2 Dansoz Zili 3 Dansoz Zili 4 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Dum EQ Darbuka Dum1 Ayt Def Parmak Zil Tek1 EQ Darbuka Tokat EQ Darbuka Tek01 EQ Darbuka Tek02 Stereo Bendir Dum Stereo Bendir Kap Stereo Bendir Tek1 Stereo Bendir Tek2 Hallo Stereo Dum Hallo Stereo Kapali Vlk Davul Dum 2 Vlk Davul Dum 1 Vlk Davul Roll1 Vlk Davul Tek 1 Vlk Davul Tek 2 Vlk Davul Tek 3 Vlk Davul Tek 4 Vlk Davul Tek 5 Vlk Davul Tek 6 Sm Davul Roll Sm Davul Dum Sm Davul Tek1 Sm Davul Tek2 Sm Davul Tek3 Sm Davul Tek4 Sm Davul Tek5 Sm Davul Dum Cr N Davul Dum3 Ams Davul Dum 1 Ams Davul Dum 2 Ams Davul Tek 1 Ams Davul Tek 2 Ams Davul Tek 3 N Davul C Dum3 Mc Kemik Def Right Dum Mc Kemik Def Right Tek1 Mc Kemik Def Right Tek2 Mc Kemik Def Right Tek3 Mc Kemik Def Right Tek4 N Davul Dum2 N Davul Dum3 N Davul Tek1 N Davul Tek2 N Davul Tek3 N Davul Tek4 N Davul Tek5 N Davul Tk1 N Davul Tk2 N Davul Tk3 N Davul Tk Song List / Song-Liste / Liste des morceaux / Şarkı Listesi Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Demo Arabic Demo (Yamaha Original) Khaligi Demo (Yamaha Original) Iranian Demo (Yamaha Original) Turkish Demo (Yamaha Original) Greek Demo (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–5). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ • Einige Songs wurden gekürzt oder vereinfacht und weichen möglicherweise vom Original ab. • Es ist ein Notenheft (Song Book; kostenlose herunterladbare Noten) erhältlich, das die Noten aller integrierten Songs enthält (außer Songs 1–5). Um das Notenheft zu erhalten, füllen Sie das AnwenderRegistrierungsformular auf der folgenden Website aus. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ • Certains morceaux ont été modifiés pour des raisons de longueur ou pour en faciliter l'apprentissage et peuvent, de ce fait, être légèrement différents des originaux. • Un recueil de morceaux est disponible, comprenant les partitions (téléchargeables gratuitement) de l'ensemble des morceaux internes (à l'exception des morceaux 1 - 5). Pour obtenir le recueil de morceaux, remplissez la fiche d'enregistrement utilisateur, accessible via le site Web suivant. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ • Şarkılardan bazıları uzunluk ya da kolay öğrenilmesi için düzenlenmiştir ve orijinali ile tamamen aynı olmayabilir. • Cihazın içindeki tüm şarkılar için partisyonları içeren bir şarkı kitabı (ücretsiz indirilebilen partisyonlar) edinilebilir (1-5 arası şarkılar hariç). Şarkı Kitabı'nı edinmek için aşağıdaki web sitesinde kullanıcı kaydını tamamlayın. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ PSR-A350 71 Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Tarz Listesi Style No. Style Name ARABIC Style Name 58 KaratchiMaroc Style No. Style Name 115 Kamilieriko 1 Saeidy 59 FazzaniTunisi 2 ChaabiModern 60 Ghita 116 BritPopRock 3 Mahragan 61 Souga 117 8BeatModern 4 SaidiDance 62 Fazzani 118 Cool8Beat 5 KatakoftiLeb 6 WehdeLeb 63 7 LaffSyria 8 LaffMaksoum 9 IRANIAN POP & ROCK 119 StadiumuRock 6/8Pop 120 70sRock 64 6/8Looti 121 HardRock 65 6/8Rengi 122 60sGuitarPop BaladiLeb 66 6/8Qeri 123 8BeatAdria 10 Baladi 67 6/8Modern1 124 60s8Beat 11 Katakoufti 68 Bandari1 125 8Beat 12 Maksoum 69 BandariModern 126 OffBeat 13 Ayoub 70 KordiPop 127 Folkrock 14 WehdaSaghira 71 Bandari2 128 60sRock 15 MaksoumSarih 72 6/8Azari 129 RockShuffle 16 Ibrahimi 73 AzariLezgi 130 8BeatRock 17 Zaffah 74 6/8SlowAzari 131 16Beat 18 Hajaa 75 2/4Azari 132 PopShuffle 19 6/8Soudasi 76 6/8Afqani 133 GuitarPop 20 Wehda 77 Raghs 134 16BeatUptempo 21 SaeidyDance 78 6/8Dance 135 KoolShuffle 22 Laff 79 KoocheBazaari 136 HipHopLight 23 Rumba 80 IranianClub1 24 Fox 81 IranianClub2 137 70sGlamPiano 25 Valse 82 3/4Irani 138 PianoBallad 26 10/8Samai 83 AstaAzari 139 LoveSong 84 6/8Modern2 140 6/8ModernEP 85 6/8Tombak 141 6/8SlowRock 142 OrganBallad KHALIGI 72 Style No. BALLAD 27 Haiwa 28 Georgina 29 RombaLive 86 Vahde 143 PopBallad 30 BandariSeeroos 87 TurkishDance 144 16BeatBallad 31 Dosari 88 2/4Oyun 32 Sowahli 89 Misket 145 ClubBeat 33 KhebatiLive 90 3/4Slow 146 Electronica 34 Atbah 91 4/4Oriental 147 FunkyHouse 35 BandariEmirates 92 6/8Azeri 148 RetroClub 36 Khebaiti3/4 93 7/8Turku 149 USHipHop 37 Khebaiti4/4 94 7/8Karadeniz 150 MellowHipHop 38 Yanbaawi 95 2/4&6/8Halay 151 Chillout 39 Samri 96 Ciftetelli 152 EuroTrance 40 Bastah 97 9/4Zeybek 153 Ibiza 41 Adaniat 98 6/8Halay 154 SwingHouse 42 Laiwa 99 9/8Teke 155 Clubdance 43 Stati 100 9/8Tsm 156 ClubLatin Garage TURKISH DANCE 44 Sout4/4 101 TurkPop 157 45 Muruba 102 9/8Trance 158 TechnoParty 46 Dazza 103 VahdeR&B 159 UKPop 47 Tamburah 104 9/8Disco 160 HipHopGroove 48 Sharh 105 Dansoz 161 HipShuffle 49 Ashori GREEK 162 HipHopPop 50 ShaabiEmirates 106 Zeibekikos 163 ModernDisco 51 IraqiMix 107 Tsifteteli 164 70sDisco MAGHREBI 108 Kalamatianos 165 LatinDisco 52 BadouiWahrani 109 Syrtorumba 166 SaturdayNight 53 HadiBerwali 110 Tsamikos 167 54 LibiChaabi 111 Karsilamas 55 Aissawi 112 Hasapiko 168 BigBandFast 56 Zayani6/8 113 5/8Greek 169 BigBandBallad 57 Chaabi 114 Hasaposerviko 170 AcousticJazz PSR-A350 DiscoHands SWING&JAZZ Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Tarz Listesi Style No. Style Name 171 AcidJazz 172 JazzClub 173 Swing 174 Five/Four 175 BrazilianSamba LATIN 176 BossaNova 177 Reggaeton 178 Mambo 179 Salsa 180 Beguine 181 Reggae 182 Tango 183 Pasodoble 184 Samba 185 ChaChaCha 186 Rumba 187 GermanMarch 188 6/8March 189 PolkaPop 190 OberPolka 191 Tarantella WORLD 192 Showtune 193 AfricanGospelReggae 194 HighLife 195 VienneseWaltz WALTZ 196 EnglishWaltz 197 SwingWaltz 198 JazzWaltz 199 OberkrainerWalzer 200 Musette 201 Learning2/4 202 Learning4/4 203 Learning6/8 204 Stride 205 PianoSwing CHILDREN PIANIST 206 Arpeggio 207 SlowRock 208 8BeatPianoBallad 209 6/8PianoMarch 210 PianoWaltz PSR-A350 73 Effect Type List / Effekttypenliste / Liste des types d'effets / Efekt Türü Listesi Harmony Types / Harmony-Typen / Types d'effets Harmony / Armoni Türleri No. Harmony Type 001 Duet 002 Trio 003 Block 004 Country 005 Octave 006 Trill 1/4 note 007 Trill 1/6 note 008 Trill 1/8 note Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. Wenn Sie möchten, dass einer der Harmonietypen 01-05 erklingt, schlagen Sie bitte nach Aktivierung der Begleitautomatik Tasten rechts vom Splitpunkt an, während Sie auf der linken Tastaturseite Akkorde spielen. Der von Ihnen gespielten Note werden automatisch eine, zwei oder drei Harmonienoten hinzugefügt. Bei der Wiedergabe von Songs mit Akkorddaten wird der Harmonieeffekt angewendet, gleichgültig, welche Tasten angeschlagen werden. Si vous voulez entendre un des types d'harmonie 01–05, jouez des notes à droite du point de partage tout en jouant des accords dans la partie gauche du clavier après avoir activé l'accompagnement automatique. Une, deux ou trois notes d'harmonie sont automatiquement ajoutées à la note que vous jouez. Lors de la reproduction d'un morceau contenant des données d'accord, l'harmonie est appliquée quelles que soient les notes jouées. 01–05 arasındaki armoni türlerinden birini seslendirmek istediğinizde, Otomatik Eşlik özelliğini etkinleştirdikten sonra klavyenin sol tarafında akorları çalarken, Ayırma Noktası'nın sağ tarafındaki tuşları çalın. Armoninin bir, iki veya üç notası, çaldığınız notaya otomatik olarak eklenir. Akor verilerini içeren bir Şarkı yeniden çalınırken, basılan tuşlara uygun biçimde armoni eklenir. If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. 009 Trill 1/12 note 010 Trill 1/16 note 011 Trill 1/24 note 012 Trill 1/32 note Wenn Sie zwei verschiedene Noten gedrückt halten, werden die Noten fortlaufend abwechselnd gespielt (als Triller). Si vous maintenez deux notes différentes enfoncées, les notes alternent en continu (dans une trille). İki farklı notayı basılı tuttuğunuzda, notalar (tril yapılarak) sürekli olarak yer değiştirir. 74 013 Tremolo 1/4 note 014 Tremolo 1/6 note 015 Tremolo 1/8 note 016 Tremolo 1/12 note 017 Tremolo 1/16 note 018 Tremolo 1/24 note 019 Tremolo 1/32 note 020 Echo 1/4 note 021 Echo 1/6 note 022 Echo 1/8 note 023 Echo 1/12 note 024 Echo 1/16 note 025 Echo 1/24 note 026 Echo 1/32 note PSR-A350 If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) Wenn Sie eine einzelne Note gedrückt halten, wird die Note fortlaufend wiederholt. (Die Wiederholungsgeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.) Si vous maintenez une note unique enfoncée, celle-ci est répétée en continu. (La vitesse de répétition varie en fonction du type sélectionné.) Bir tek notayı basılı tuttuğunuzda, nota sürekli olarak tekrarlanır. (Tekrarlanma hızı, seçilen türe bağlı olarak değişir.) If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) Wenn Sie eine Note gedrückt halten, wird auf die gespielte Note die Echofunktion angewendet. (Die Echogeschwindigkeit hängt vom ausgewählten Typ ab.) Si vous maintenez une note enfoncée, un écho est appliqué à la note jouée. (La vitesse de l'écho varie en fonction du type sélectionné.) Bir notayı basılı tuttuğunuzda, çalınan notaya eko özelliği eklenir. (Eko hızı, seçilen türe bağlı olarak değişir.) Effect Type List / Effekttypenliste / Liste des types d'effets / Efekt Türü Listesi Arpeggio Type List / Liste der Arpeggio-Typen / Liste des types d'arpege / Arpej Türü Listesi Arpeggio No. 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 Arpeggio Name UpOct DownOct UpDwnOct SynArp1 SynArp2 SynArp3 SynArp4 SyncEcho PulsLine StepLine Random Down&Up SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Planet Trance1 Trance2 Trance3 ChordAlt SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Syncopa Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 Hybrid4 Hybrid5 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PfArp4 PfClub1 PfClub2 PfBallad PfChd8th EPArp PfShufle PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 RocknPf 70RockPf SlowflPf SoulPf ChordUp ChdDance LatinRck Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BalladEP Strum1 Strum2 Strum3 Strum4 Pickin1 Pickin2 Funky GtrChrd1 GtrChrd2 GtrChrd3 GtrArp Arpeggio No. 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 Arpeggio Name FngrPck1 FngrPck2 CleanGtr Slowfl Samba1 Samba2 Spanish1 Spanish2 Harp1 Harp2 FngrBas1 FngrBas2 FngrBas3 CoolFunk SlapBass AcidBas1 AcidBas2 FunkyBas CmbJazB1 CmbJazB2 CmbJazB3 NewR&BBs HipHopBs SmoothBs DreamBas TranceBs LatinBas Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Strings4 StrngDwn StrngUp OrcheStr Jupiter Pizz1 Pizz2 BrasSec1 BrasSec2 BrasSec3 FunkBras SoulReed DiscoLd SmoothPd PercArp Ethnic Cresendo DiscoCP Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 Funk3 Soul ClscHip Smooth NewGospl CmbJazz1 CmbJazz2 Bebop JazzHop FolkRock Unpluggd HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step Arpeggio No. 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 Arpeggio Name ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza1 Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage Samba African Latin Arabic Khaligi Maghrebi Iranian Turkish PSR-A350 75 Effect Type List / Effekttypenliste / Liste des types d'effets / Efekt Türü Listesi Reverb Types / Reverb-Effekttypen / Types d'effets Reverb / Yankı Türleri No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. Nachhall in einem Konzertsaal. Réverbération d'une salle de concert. Konser salonu yankısı. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. Nachhall in einem kleineren Raum. Réverbération d'une petite salle. Küçük oda yankısı. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. Halleffekte für Soloinstrumente. Réverbération pour instruments solo. Solo enstrümanlar için yankı. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Simulation des Halls in einer Stahlplatte. Simulation de la réverbération d'une plaque d'acier. Benzeşik çelik levha yankısı. Off No effect. Kein Effekt. Pas d'effet. Efekt yok. 10 Chorus Types / Chorus-Effekttypen / Types d'effets Chorus / Koro Türleri No. Description 1–3 Chorus 1–3 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Herkömmlicher Chorus-Effekt mit vollem und warmem Klang. Programme de choeur classique avec un effet de choeur riche et chaud. Zengin ve sıcak koroya sahip klasik koro programı. 4–5 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Hiermit wird eine volltönende und lebhafte Tonhöhenschwankung erzeugt. Vous obtenez un effet d'ondulation riche et animé dans le son. Bu, sese zengin ve canlı bir titreme efekti katar. Off No effect. Kein Effekt. Pas d'effet. Efekt yok. 6 76 Chorus Type PSR-A350 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) PSR-A350 77 78 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Ürünler hakkında ayrıntılar için, lütfen aşağıda listelenen size en yakın Yamaha temsilcisine veya yetkili bayiye başvurun. MALTA NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 FINLAND Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 CYPRUS Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY SWEDEN VENEZUELA BULGARIA Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI15 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation Published 03/2016 PO##*.*-**A0 Printed in China ZT29180